15 & 150-Model B Connection Manual (Hardware) GFZ-62073EN.pdf

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 – Model B

Connection Manual (Hardware)

GFZ-62073E/04 November 1998

GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this Publication

Warning

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment ormay be associated with its use.

In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, aWarning notice is used.

Caution

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

NoteNotes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding andoperating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While effortshave been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover alldetails or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency inconnection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described hereinwhich are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumesno obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutorywith respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, orusefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness forpurpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

B–62073E/04 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

s–1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to themachine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Notethoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the userbeing injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is notobserved.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

Table of ContentsB–62073E/04

c–1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE s–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. GENERAL 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. CONFIGURATION 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. INSTALLATION 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 Cabinet Exterior Environmental Requirements 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Installation Conditions of the CNC Inside Cabinet and Servo Unit 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 POWER CAPACITY 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 CABINET DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF

THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Heat Loss of Each Unit 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Cooling Fin A/B/C 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.3 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.3.1 Installation 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.3.2 Maintenance 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 ACTION AGAINST NOISE 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Separating Signal Lines 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 Ground 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.3 Grounding Each Unit 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.4 Noise Suppressor 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 CONTROL UNIT 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Configuration and Installation of the Control Unit 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.2 Battery for Memory Backup 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.3 Replacing the Battery 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 CABLE LEAD–IN DIAGRAM 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1 Configuration of Control Unit Connectors 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 Cable Lead–in for Stand–alone Cabinet A 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.3 Cable Lead–in for Stand–alone Cabinet B 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.4 Cable Lead–in for Additional Cabinet A 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9 MAINTENANCE AREA 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1 Maintenance Area for Self–standing A Type Cabinet 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.2 Maintenance Area for Self–standing B Type Cabinet 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.3 Maintenance Area for Additional Cabinet A 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. TOTAL CONNECTION 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, SERIES 150–TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF SERIAL SPINDLE) 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1 Connection Diagram for Series 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, Series 150–TB/MB/TTB (When LCD/MDI Unit with Built–in Graphic Functions is not Used) 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.2 Connection Diagram for Series 15–TB/TTB/MB (When LCD/MDI Unit with Built–in Graphic Functions is Used) 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62073E/04

c–2

4.2 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, SERIES 150–TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF ANALOG SPINDLE) 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–MB OR SERIES 150–MB (IN CASE OF MULTIPLE AXIS) 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.1 Control Unit 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.2 Additional Cabinet (In Case of Serial Spindle Interface) 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.3 Additional Cabinet (In Case of Analog Spindle Interface) 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.4 Connection Between the Control Unit and Additional Locker 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–B (IN CASE OF MMC–II) 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–B (IN CASE OF MMC–III) 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MMC–IV 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT PANEL LAYOUT 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1 When an Input Unit is not Used 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2 When an Input Unit is Used 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.3 When AC Output Terminals for Which Power On/Off is Controlled are Insufficient 103. . . . . . .

5.2.4 Power ON Sequence 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.5 Power OFF Sequence 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET A 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1 Input Unit Layout 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.2 Connection to Input Units (A14B–0076–B004, –B005, and –B008) 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.3 Connection to the Control Unit 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET B 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5.4.2 Connection to Input Unit (A14B–0076–B411) 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.3 Connection to Control Unit 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5 CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR ADDITIONAL CABINET A 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5.5.2 Cable Connection [Connection to the Input Unit (A02B–0075–J141, –J142, –J144, and –J145)] 116. . . . . . . . . . . .

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 OUTLINE 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O LINK 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O UNIT–MODEL A 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.1 Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.2 Outer Dimensions 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.3 Mounting and Dismounting Modules 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.4 Connection Diagram 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.5 Connecting Input Power Source 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.6 Grounding 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.7 Connecting Signal Cables 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.8 Connecting with I/O Modules 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE OF CONTENTSB–62073E/04

c–3

6.3.9 Digital Input/Output Module 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.10 Correspondence between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.11 Number of I/O Points for I/O Unit–MODEL A 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 CONNECTING THE CONNECTION UNIT 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Connecting Connection Unit 1 and Connection Unit 2 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Input Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Output Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.4 Connector Pin Assignment for the Connection Unit 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.5 Details of the Connection between the Connection Unit and the Machine 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.6 External View of the Connection Unit 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 Input Signal Regulations for the Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 Output Signal Regulations for the Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.3 Connector Layout for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4 Details of the Connection between the Operator’s Panel Connection Unit and the Machine 181. 6.5.5 External View of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6 CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT 189. . . . . . . 6.6.1 Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit Input Signal Standard 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Output Signal Standard for Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 192. . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 ALARM LEDs on Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.4 Connector Pin Assignment Addresses of Source Output

Operator ’s Panel Connection Unit 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.5 Details of Machine Side Connections of Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 199. 6.6.6 External Dimensions of Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7 ADDRESS–FIXED SIGNALS 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1 CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 Outline 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 9″ CRT or 9″ PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Non–compliant) 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.3 9″ CRT or PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant) 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.4 14″ Analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD Display Interface

(CE Marking Compliant when MMC–IV is not Used) 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.5 14″ Analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD Display Interface

(CE Marking Compliant when MMC–IV is Used) 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.6 10.4″ LCD Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant with Built–in Graphic Function) 222. . . . 7.1.7 Adjusting the Flat Display 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.8 Interface between MMC–IV Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.9 Keyboard Interface 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.10 Small 9″ Keyboard Interface 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.11 Interface between MMC–III Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 I/O DEVICE INTERFACE 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 RS–232–C Serial Port 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 PPR Connection 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.3 Portable Tape Reader Connection 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.4 FANUC Cassette Connection 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.5 Connection with the FANUC Handy File 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.6 Connection of Tape Reader Without Reels 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.7 Connection of Tape Reader with Reels 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.8 RS–422 Serial Port 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62073E/04

c–4

7.3 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–232–C) 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–422) 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6 HIGH–SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7 CONNECTION OF REFERENCE POSITION APPROACH SIGNAL 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.8 DNC INTERFACE 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.8.1 DNC1 Interface 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.8.2 DNC2 Interface (RS–232–C) 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.8.3 DNC2 Interface (RS422) 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9 SPINDLE INTERFACE 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9.1 Serial Spindle Interface (S Series Spindle) 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9.2 Serial Spindle Interface (α Series) 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9.3 Analog Spindle Interface 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9.4 Pulse Coder Interface 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10 SERVO INTERFACE 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.1 Outline 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.2 Servo Amp Interface 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.3 Serial Pulse Coder Interface 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.4 Linear Scale Interface (A/B/Z Signal Interface) 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.5 Linear Scale Interface (Serial Interface) 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.6 APC Battery Interface 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.7 Hybrid–control Connections 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.11 GENERAL–PURPOSE ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT INTERFACE 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.12 CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) AND PERIPHERAL UNITS 275. . . . . .

7.13 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING THE RS–422 INTERFACE FOR SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.14 CONNECTION WITH A PRINTER USING THE CENTRONICS INTERFACE FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.15 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTENSION ADAPTOR UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16 CONNECTION WITH A HARD DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) 283. . . . . . . .

7.17 CONNECTION WITH A FLOPPY DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) 287. . . . . . .

7.18 RS–232–C SERIAL PORT (MMC–III) 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.19 OUTER HARD DISK INTERFACE (MMC–III) 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX

A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D. ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–62073E/04 1. GENERAL

1

1 GENERAL

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications requiredfor connecting the CNC control units, FANUC Series 15–MODELB/Series 150–MODEL B, with a machine tool, and covers the equipmentshown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2. When using the CNCcontrol units, be sure to connect and install them following theinstructions in this manual. The manual outlines the units commonly usedfor Fanuc CNC control units, that is, the I/O unit, servo motor, spindlemotor, and so on, and describes additional information on using theseunits for the Series 15/150–B. Refer to individual manuals for thedetailed specifications of each unit.Multiple models of Series 15/150–B products are provided so that theycorrespond to various machine tools (lathe, machining center, etc.),respectively. The description in this manual is common to these models.Whenever each model has different restrictions, the abbreviation of themodel and notes are described. See the following table for the names andabbreviations of the models described in this manual.

This manual comprises the following chapters and appendix.

1. GENERAL

This chapter. It describes the outline and organization of this manual,names of models applied and other related manuals.

2. CONFIGURATION

This chapter describes the configuration of the electrical system of themachine tool with which the CNC is used.

3. INSTALLATION

This chapter describes how to install the CNC.

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

This chapter shows the connection diagrams for the CNC and eachdevice.

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION

This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the power supplyunit and input unit.

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE

This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the I/O unit tomachine interface.

Contents of this manual

How this manual isorganized

B–62073E/041. GENERAL

2

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALSThis chapter describes the connection of the CNC to peripherals.

APPENDIXThis appendix contains an explanation of the CNC control unit,external dimensions of the display apparatus and details on the 20–pininterface connectors and cables.

This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated names may be used.

Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 15–TB 15–TB

FANUC Series 15–TFB 15–TFB

FANUC Series 15TED–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TED

FANUC Series 15TEE–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEE

FANUC Series 15TEF–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEF

FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB Series 15–B

FANUC Series 15–MFB 15–MFB

FANUC Series 15MEK–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15MEK

FANUC Series 15MEL–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15MEL

FANUC Series 15–TTB 15–TTB

FANUC Series 15–TTFB 15–TTFB

FANUC Series 150–TB 150–TB

FANUC Series 150–TTB 150–TTB Series 150–B

FANUC Series 150–MB 150–MB

(*1) With 15TED, 15TEE, and 15TEF, some options are not available.Moreover, the following PC boards cannot be used: Sub–CPU board RISC board OSI ethernet board

(*2) The MMC board can be used only with the Series 150.

(*3) See FANUC MMC-IV Connection and Maintenance Manual(B-62493E) for connection related to MMC-IV.

Applicable models

B–62073E/04 1. GENERAL

3

Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).

List of manuals related to Series 15/150–MODEL B

Manual Name SpecificationNumber

FANUC Series 15–TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B–62072E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS B–62082E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL B–62073E *

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) B–62073E–1

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62554E

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62554E–1

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62564E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62564E–1

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL B–62560E

FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62075E

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer) B–62072E–1

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer) B–62073E–2

PMC

FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61013E

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61863E

FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61013E–2

FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61863E–1

FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language – Tool Management Library)

B–61013E–4

Conversational Automatic Programming Function

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER (Series 15–MF/MFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B–61263E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER (Series 15–MF/MFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–61264E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE (Series 15–TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–61234E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE (Series 15–TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–61804E–2

Tracing / Digitizing

FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62472E

FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62473E

FANUC Series 15–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62474E

Gas, Laser Plasma Cutting Machine

FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (FOR GAS, LASER PLASMA CUTTING MACHINE) B–62082EN–1

Multi–Teaching Function

FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Multi–Teaching Function) B–62083E–1

Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function

FANUC Series 15–TTB OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Supplement Explanations for Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function)

B–62074E–1

Manuals related toSeries 15/150–MODEL B

B–62073E/042. CONFIGURATION

4

2 CONFIGURATION

The following figure (see next page) shows the configuration of theelectrical system of the machine tool with which the Series 15–B is used.This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.The machine tool body, machine operator’s panel, power magneticcircuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are thebuilder’s responsibility. This manual does not cover the internalconnection of these units to the machine tool. The numbers in parentheses shown in the diagram are section referencesfor this manual.

B–62073E/04 2. CONFIGURATION

5

(7.9)

(7.10)

(6.2, 6.3,6.4, 6.7)

(6.4, 6.5, 6.6)

NOTE1 Refer to the “FANUC I/O Unit–Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).” or the

“FANUC I/O Unit–Model B Connecting Manual (B–62163E).”2 Refer to the “FANUC AC Servo Motor α series Descriptions (B–65142E).”3 Refer to the “FANUC AC Spindle Motor α series Descriptions (B–65152E).”

B–62073E/043. INSTALLATION

6

3 INSTALLATION

B–62073E/04 3. INSTALLATION

7

The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have beendesigned on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. Inthis manual “cabinet” refers to the following:

(1)Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing thecontrol unit or peripheral units;

(2)Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC;

(3)Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, forhousing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel ; or

(4)Equivalent to the above.

The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shallconform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation anddesign conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.

Conditions

When a PCBwith internal

hard disk is notmounted

When a PCBwith internalhard disk is

mounted

AmbientIn operation 0°C to 45°C 5°C to 40°C

Ambienttemperaturearound cabinet

In storage ortransportation

–20°C to 60°C

Change intemperature

1.1°C/minutemax.

0.3°C/minutemax.

Humidity

Normal

Relative humidity75% or less, nocondensationallowed

Relative humidity10 to 75%, nocondensationallowed

Humidity

Temporary (within onemonth)

Relative humidity95% or less, nocondensationallowed

Relative humidity10 to 90%, nocondensationallowed

In operation 0.5 G or less

Vibration In storage ortransportation

1.0 G or less

Environment

Normal machine shop environment(The environment must beconsidered if the cabinets are in alocation where the concentration ofdust, coolant, and/or organic solventis relatively high.)

3.1ENVIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTS

3.1.1Cabinet ExteriorEnvironmentalRequirements


8

Ambienttemperature

In operation: 0 to 55°C (when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)

In operation: 5 to 50°C (when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)

In storage and transportation: –20 to 60°C

Humidity Relative humidity: 95% or less, no condensation allowed(when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)

Relative humidity: 75% or less, no condensation allowed(when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)

Vibration In operation: 0.5 G or less

Environment Coolant, lubricants and chips must not splash these units.

3.1.2Installation Conditionsof the CNC InsideCabinet and Servo Unit


9

The power capacity of the CNC control unit, which in this section meansthe specification required for the power supply, is obtained by adding thepower capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servosection.The power capacity of the control section includes the power capacity ofthe control unit, CRT/MDI, I/O unit, and operator’s panel interface.

Power capacity of theWhen power supply Al is used. 0.4 KVA

Power ca acity of thecontrol section When power supply BI is used. 1 KVA

Power capacity of theservo section

Depends on servo motor type.

3.2POWER CAPACITY


10

When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditionsdescribed in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on theCRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must beconsidered. The cabinet is design must meet the following conditions :

(1)The cabinet must be fully closed.The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne dust,coolant, and organic solvent.

(2)The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperatureof 10°C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air as thetemperature in the cabinet increases.See Section 3.4 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.

(3)A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the airwithin. The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along thesurface of each installed unit.

Caution: If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easilyabheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.

(4)For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required betweeneach unit and the wall of the cabinet.

(5)Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door inoreder to seal the cabinet.Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximatery 11 KV to 20KV, airborne dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed,dust passes through the gap and abheres to the unit. This may causethe insulation of the unit to deteriorate.

Acceptable packing materials:

Epton sealer No. 686, Nitto Industry Co., Ltd.

Polyurethane foam (ester) covered with vinyl chloride, FujiRubber Co., Ltd.

(6)The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolantcannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dust–proof frontpanel.The front panel of the CRT/MDI unit is dust–proof. However, we donot recommend installing the CRT/MDI unit in locations wherecoolant directly splashes the front panel. Also, high–voltage is usedin the internal circuits of the CRT/MDI unit. Coolant entering theCRT/MDI unit might cause serious trouble. The operation pendantcontaining the cabinet and CRT/MDI unit is completely sealed, anddesigned to prevent dirt, dust and coolant from entering. Pay particularattention to preventing dust entering the CRT/MDI unit.

(7)Noise must be minimized.As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts thatgenerate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in themagnetics cabinet.The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet designto minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmittedto the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.6 for details of noiseelimination/management.

(8)The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they areeasy to inspect and maintain.

3.3CABINET DESIGNAND INSTALLATIONCONDITIONS OF THEMACHINE TOOLMAGNETIC


11

(9)The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near theCRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To preventthis, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generatlly must be kept300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changingthe direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased bymagnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interactingwith each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magneticsources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorteddespite the distance, it may be necessary to cover the screen with amagnetic shield.

(10) The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installedin the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mmor more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring andventilation.Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.

Top

Bottom

I/O base unit (No screws or protrusions shall extendfrom the bottom of this unit.)

(11) If the CNC unit is installed at an elevation exceeding 1000 m, the upperlimit temperature of the CNC inside the cabinet at the environmentalconditions described in section 3.1 is subject to restrictions.With each increase of 100 m above an elevation of 100 m, the upperlimit temperature is reduced by 1°C.

Example) When the CNC unit is installed at an elevation of 1750 m,the allowable upper limit temperature of the CNC insidethe cabinet is calculated as follows:55°C–1750/100 1.0°C+ 47.5°CAccordingly the allowable temperature range is 0°C to47.5°C

When a PCB with built–in hard disk is used, the installation elevationis restricted as follows:

Standard elevation when in operation: –60 to 3,000 mStandard elevation when not in operation: –60 to 12,000 m

(12) In unspecified frequencies, the CNC control unit or the hard disk itselfmay resonate. If this happens, resonation may cause accelerationbeyond the allowable limits of the devices. Full check this afterinstalling the CNC control unit in the machine tool.


12

NOTEWhen a PCB with built–in hard disk is used, erroneousoperation or unexpected accidents may damage the datastored on the hard disk even if the PCB is used under thecorrect environment. To be extra sure, back up importantdata from the hard disk. If the power is turned OFF or a power interruption occursduring accessing of the hard disk or while the operatingsystem is still running, data on the hard disk is more likelyto be damaged. Avoid this at all costs. Also, instruct the enduser to pay attention to this.


13

The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the differencein temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10°Cor less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units andparts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat isradiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in thecabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amountof heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, theless the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinetrefers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating thesurface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installingheat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method isdescribed in the following subsections.

The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°Cper 1 m2 surface area, that is, when the 6 W heat source is contained ina cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in thecabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers tothe area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the areaof the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited bythe fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almostconstant.To calculate the increase in temperature inside the cabinet, the heat lossof the units to be installed must be checked. Section 3.4.3 lists the heatlosses of the units provided by FANUC. The heat loss of all other partsin the cabinet must also be added. Let the obtained total heat loss be P[W].The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the difference intemperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10°C orless as the temperature in the cabinet rises:

Internal heat loss P [W]x 6 [W/m2·°C] surface area S [m2] 10 [°C] of rise in temperature

For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 has a cooling capacityof 24 W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C underthese conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240 W. If the actualinternal heat is 320 W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by13°C or more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinetmust be improved using the heat exchanger described next.

If the temperature rise cannot be limited to 10°C by the cooling capacityof the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchangerforcibly applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet tothe cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlargesthe surface area. Section 3.5 explains five heat exchangers supplied byFANUC. Select one of these according to the application.

If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of acabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improvedas follows:

3.4THERMAL DESIGNOF THE CABINET

3.4.1Temperature Risewithin the Cabinet

3.4.2Cooling by HeatExchanger


14

6 W/m2/°C 4 m2) 9.1 W/°C+ 33.1 W/°C

The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, thetemperature rise can be limited to less than 10°C.

See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.

Name Heatloss Remarks

Control unit Basic unit (4 slots) 60W Power supply AI

Basic unit (4 slots) 80W Power supply BI



Main CPU board 20W

PMC board 18W

Sub board 18W

Option 1 board 15W

RISC Board 18W Cannot be used on15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL

Buffer board (Multiple axis) 6W

AXES CPU (Multiple axis) 15W

MMC–II CPU board 20W Can be used only on series 150–B

MMC–II Graphic board 20W Can be used only on series 150–B

MMC–III CPU board 20W Can be used only on series 150–B

MMC–IV CPU board 15W Can be used only on series 150–B

OSI/Ethernet board 18W Cannot be used on15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL

Data server board 18W

HSSB interface board 3W Can be used only on series 150–B

CRT/MDI 9″ monochrome CRT/MDI 14W For both small and standard type

9″ color CRT/MDI 38W For both small and standard type

9″ monochrome PDP/MDI 20W For both small and standard type

10.4″ color LCD/MDI 20W For both graphic function built–in type and MMC–IV

9.5″ color LCD/MDI 20W

14″ color CRT/MDI 70W

9.5″ LCD (monochrome STN) 10W

3.4.3Heat Loss of Each Unit


15

Name RemarksHeatloss

Connection unit Connection unit 1 35W

Connection unit 1+2 60W

Operator’spanel

Operator’s panel connection unit 30W

I/O unit model A

AIF01A, AIF01B 1.2Wmodel A

AID32A, AID32B 1.2W) 0.23W number of ON points

AID16A, AID16B 0.1W) 0.21W number of ON points

AID32E, AID32F 0.1W) 0.23W number of ON points

I/O unit model B

BIF04A1 1.6Wmodel B

AIF02C 1.2W

BID16A1, BID16B1 1.5W) 0.23 number of ON input points

BID16P1, BID16Q1 0.6W) 0.23 number of ON input points

BOA12A1 0.9W) (0.09 1.1 IL2) number of ON output points

BOD16A1 1.0W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

BOD16P1 0.3W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

BIA16P1 0.1W) 0.21 number of ON input points

BMD88A1, BMD88B1 1.3W) 0.23 number of ON input points)(0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

IL: load currentof output

BMD88P1, BMD88Q1 0.4W) 0.23 number of ON input points)(0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

MMC–II Hard disk unit 26W

Panel mount type 3.5″ floppy diskunit

3W

Portable type 3.5″ floppy disk unit 12W

Portable type 5.25″ floppy disk unit 26W

Full–key board unit 2W

Extention adapter unit 7W

Portable cassette streamer unit 24W

Multi–tap transformer 51W

See FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS(B–65162E) for heat loss of servo amplifier.


16

Table 3.5 lists the heat exchangers.Cooling fins A, B and C are not provided with a fan. Note that a fan motoris required for any of these cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.

Table 3.5 List of heat exchangers

Name Ordering specification

Coolingcapacity Size

Cooling fin A A02B–0053–K303 9.1 W/°C 196 90 1000 mm

Cooling fin B A02B–0053–K304 10.1 W/°C 444 90 650 mm

Cooling fin C A02B–0053–K305 25.2 W/°C 560 90 970 mm

Heat exchanger forCRT/MDI unit

A02B–0060–K401 5.0 W/°C 390 86 480 mm

Heat pipe type heatexchanger

A02B–0094–C901 9.0 W/°C 226 132 415 mm

The cooling fin is shown below (Fig. 3.5.1 (a)). It is installed in a cabinetmade by the machine tool builder.

Viewed from cabinet mounting side

Fig. 3.5.1 (a) External view of cooling fin

3.5INSTALLING THEHEAT EXCHANGER

3.5.1Cooling Fin A/B/C


17

Cabinet

Cooling fin

Outside airflow

Inside airflow

Fig. 3.5.1 (b) Internal view of cooling fin

The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig. 3.5.1 (b).The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using thecooling fins :

1) The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should beprovided by the machine tool builder.

2) Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air fromthe top.

3) The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,generally decide the direction as follows :

a) Bring in the air near high heat loss components.

b) Exhaust the air toward the most important components to becooled.

4) For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the airinside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.(velocity of air flow measurement)

Set the slit to the intake side andmeasure the velocity at the slit.

5) Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the doordoes not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins areequipped with packing.


18

External dimensions

Mounting metalsfor cooling fins4–M4Mounting screw

4–M4Mounting screwfor fan mounting plate

Panel cut drawing

(Attached tothe cooling fins.Its height is 20mm)

Terminalblock for fanmotor G–04

Mounting diagram (example)

Fan mountingplate

Fan motor

Cooling fins

Mounting metalfor cooling fins

Mounting platefor fan motorDoor

Mounting metalfor cooling fins(sheet metalabout 3 mmthick).

Fig. 3.5.1 (c) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin A (A02B–0053–K303)

NOTE1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting metal

for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling fins.So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.

2 Use two fan motors with about 50 W power.3 Weight: 6.5 kg


19

External dimensions

Panel cut drawing


Mounting holefor fan motor4–M4 Terminal block for fan motor G–04

(Attached to the cooling fins.Its height is 20 mm)

External shape ofcooling fins.

(Mounting holefor fan motor)

6–6 dia hole orM5 stud bolt

Stud hole

(Make a hole 5 diafor fan motor)

Mounting stud for cooling fins

(2 studs are attached top and bottom)

6–6 dia.Mounting hole

Mountinghole for fanmotor

Fan motor Cooling fins

Mountingplate for fanmotor

Door

Hole

Hole

4–M4

Fig. 3.5.1 (d) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B–0053–K304)

NOTE1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the

cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the machine tool builder.2 Use four fan motors with about 20 W power.3 Weight: 7.5 kg


20

External dimensions

Panel cut diagram


6–M4Mounting holefor fan motor

External shapeof cooling fins.

(Mounting holefor fan motor)

6–6 dia hole orM5 stud bolt

Mounting stud for cooling fins

(Attached to the cooling fins)

8–6 dia.Mounting hole

Mounting platefor fan motor

Fan motor

Cooling fins

Mountingplate for fanmotor

Door

Terminal blockfor fan motorG–04

(Attached tothe coolingfins.Its heightis 20 mm)

(This hole com-bines mountinghole and studhole.)

5–M4

Fig. 3.5.1 (e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B–0053–K305)

NOTE1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not

attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them at the machinetool builder.

2 Use two fan motors with about 40 W power.3 Weight: 13.5 kg


21

External Dimensions of Finger Guard

External Dimensions of ExternalCooling Fan

LotNo.

Weight: 0.65 kg

hole

Air inlet

Packing

Power terminalM4 screwAC200 V 50 HzAC200 V/220 V60 Hz48 W

Air outlet

Connector for externalcooling fan

Cooling fin: About 6 kg (Excluding attached parts)

Fig. 3.5.2 (a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI (A02B–0060–K401)

NOTEExternal cooling fan and finger guard are attached besidecooling fin.

3.5.2Heat Exchanger forCRT/MDI Unit


22

Heat exchanger

InsideOutside

Air outlet

Air outlet

(1)Air inlet

Prepare mountingscrews and mount-ing panel. External cooling fan (attached)

Finger guard (attached)

(1) Use M5 screws to mount the heat exchanger.

(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.

(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and installthe panel where it can be exchanged externally.

(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outleton heat exchanger mounting panel.

Main bodyof heat exchanger

Fig. 3.5.2 (b) Mounting methods of heat exchanger for CRT/MDI


23

Refer to these figures for allocation of CRT/MDI and heat exchanger.

370Min35 370

Min35

370Min35

Horizontal type CRT/MDI onlyHorizontal type CRT/MDIand machine operator’s panel Vertical type CRT/MDI only

Side view

Top view

CRT/MDI Heat exchanger

Inside Outside

Fig. 3.5.2 (c) Allocation of 14 ″ color CRT/MDI and heat exchanger


24

The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinetof small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, andheat–efficient unit. Because the fan is built–in, it is used simply byinstalling it, performing the “panel cut” operation.

(1)Specifications

Installation format Installation type in board

Fanspecifications

Cooling ability(W/°C)

9 (50 Hz when operating)

Voltage (V) 200 VAC

Frequency (Hz) 50 60

Rating current (A) 0.28 0.24

Rating input (W) 28 26

Weight (kg) 4

Color Munsell signal N1.5

Order specifications Heat exchanger A02B–0094–C901

Remarks

A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.

The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.

When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, preparethem separately.Fan motor specifications A90L–0001–0219#AFilter specifications A250–0689–X004

If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion mayoccur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.

3.5.3The Heat Pipe TypeHeat Exchanger

3.5.3.1Installation


25

(2)External dimensions

AIR FLOWPower sourceterminal M4

Earth terminalM4

External fan unit

Internal fan unit

AIR FLOW

(Installation board thickness)

Fig. 3.5.3.1 (a) External dimensions diagram of heat pipe type heat transformer


26

(3)Panel cut dimensions

HOLE

6–f 6 or stud welder (M4)

180

175

3–f 5

214

2.5

190

190

187.

5

Fig. 3.5.3.1 (b) External dimensions diagram of panel cut

(4) Installation methodPlease install the heater exchanger by the following sequence:

(Fig. 1) (Fig. 2)

Heat exchangermain unit

Installation screw B (1)Earth cable (if the installation screw on the fan side isdetached, it can be taken out.)

Fan power cable (detach the connector)

External fan unit

Installation screws A (2)

Installation panel

Installation screw B (1)(Fixed to the panel)

Installation screw


27

(a) Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.(Fig. 1)Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), takeout the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach theearth cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach theinstallation screw B (1 piece).

(b) Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation sectionwhich has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with thescrews, first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchangermain unit with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1).After that, secure the main unit by the installation screws. In thiscase, the external fan unit installation screw holes should bealigned with the main unit screw holes. (Please provide theinstallation screws for the heat exchanger main unit.)Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shownbelow for the screw tightening torque.Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw): 11 kgf.cmExternal fan unit (M3 screw): 5 kgf.cm

(c) Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit(the unit detached in section 1), and secure the installation screwA to the main unit from the outside.

The installation is now complete.

It is necessary to regularly clean the heat pipe type heat exchanger,because the cooling ability is reduced by the accumulation of dust. Thefrequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installationenvironment and therefore should be determined by your own judgmentregarding the amount of dirt.

(1)Air filter cleaning and replacement method

(a) When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fan’selectric power source.

(b)Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.

Detach the cover by pressing the flangeswhich are in the grooves of both sides to-wards the inside using a flat blade screw-driver, etc.

3.5.3.2Maintenance


28

(c) Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on bothsides.

(d)When dirt is conspicuous, press wash with a neutral detergent, rinsewith clean water, and allow to dry naturally. When replacing,replace with the same product.

(e) To install, insert the filter in the cover, align the flange in thegroove, and press. Confirm that the cover will not come loose evenif it is pulled.

(2)Cleaning heat exchanger

(a) When cleaning, be sure to cut off the fan power source.

(b)Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.

Heat exchangermain unit

Installation screws B (1)Earth cable (if the installation screw on thefan side is detached, it can be taken out)

Installation screws A (2)

Detach the two installationscrews (A) of the external fanunit, and detach the unit fromthe main unit by sliding itdown. Detach the powersource cable to the fan andthe earth cable. Also detachinstallation screws (B).

Power cable for fan(detach the connector)

External fan unit

(i) Cleaning fan unitWipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fanmotor and fan installation case with a dry cloth. When thecondensation, etc. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult toremove, soak a cloth in neutral detergent, lightly squeeze it andwipe away the dirt.However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electricalsections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.


29

(ii)Cleaning heat exchanger fanDetach the heat exchanger from the unit and either blow off withair, wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt,condensation, etc.

When the dirt is especially severe

(1)Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cablefrom the main unit.

Main unit

Terminal unit and cable

(2)Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fansection by brushing.At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the element.

(3)After cleaning, dry well.

(iii)InstallationAfter completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer.

(1) Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position.

(2) Install the fan unit in the original position. At this time, do notforget to connect the fan power cable and the earth cable.


30

The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount andcustom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also isdesigned to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult tomeasure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise hasmany uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from beinggenerated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. Thisprecaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generatingnoise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into theCNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and groundloops.When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in themachine as described in Subsections 3.6.1 to 3.6.5.

The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in thefollowing table:Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column.

Group Signal line Action

A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group Aseparately (Note 1) from groups

Secondary AC power lineseparately (Note 1) from groupsB and C or cover group A withan electromagnetic shield(Note

AC/DC power lines (containingthe power lines for the servoand spindle motors)

an electromagnetic shield (Note2).

See Section 3.6.4 and connectspark killers or diodes with the

AC/DC solenoidspark killers or diodes with thesolenoid and relay.

AC/DC relay

B DC solenoid (24 VDC) Connect diodes with DCsolenoid and relay

DC relay (24 VDC)solenoid and relay.

Bind the cables in group Bseparately from group A orcover group B with anelectromagnetic shield

DI/DO cable between the CNCand power magnetics cabinet

electromagnetic shield.Separate group B as far fromGroup C as possible.

DI/DO cable between the CNCand machine

It is more desirable to covergroup B with the shield.

3.6ACTION AGAINSTNOISE

3.6.1Separating SignalLines


31

Group ActionSignal line

C Cable between the CNC andservo amplifier

Bind the cables in group Cseparately from group A orcover group C with an

Cable for position and velocityfeedback

cover group C with anelectromagnetic shield.

Cable between the CNC andspindle amplifier

Separate group C as far fromCable for the position coder

Separate group C as far fromGroup B as possible.

Cable for the manual pulsegenerator

Be sure to perform shieldprocessing in Section 3.6.5.

Cable between the CRT andMDI

g

RS232C and RS422 interfacecables

Cable for the battery

Other cables to be covered withthe shield

NOTE1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another

when binding the cables in each group.2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between

groups with grounded steel plates.

The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:

(1)Signal ground system (SG)The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0 V) of theelectrical signal system to the machine.

(2)Frame ground system (FG)The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressingexternal and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the framesand cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cablesbetween the units are connected.

(3)System ground systemThe system ground system is used to connect the frame groundsystems connected between devices or units with the ground.

3.6.2Ground


32

Signal ground system

Frame ground system

System ground system

Distribution board

Powermagneticsunit

Servo amplifier

CNCcontrol unit

Power magneticscabinet

Machine toolOperator’s panel

WARNINGNotes on connecting the ground systems Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at

only one place in the CNC control unit. The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100

ohms or less (class 3 grounding). The system ground cable must have enough

cross–sectional area to safely carry the accidental currentflow into the system ground when an accident such as ashort circuit occurs.(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the ACpower cable or more.)

Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the systemground wire so that power is supplied with the ground wireconnected.


33

(a) Control unit

Control unit

Signalground (SG)

M4(Only threadhole)

M3(With thread)

Ground cable Wire with a sectionalarea 2 mm2 or more

Ground plate ofthe cabinet

System ground

Ground cable

SG

M3

PCB

Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with theground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.

3.6.3Grounding Each Unit


34

(b)CRT unit

9″ PDP

9″ CRT

9.5″ LCD

10.4″ LCD

(Rear side) M5 stud

14″CRT

(Rear side) M4 stud

(c) Connection unit 1/2

×M4 screw

(d)Operator’s panel connection unit

Ground install board×


35

(e) Tape raeder unit

M5 stud

(Rear side)

M5 stud

(Rear side)

Tape reader with reel Tape reader without reel

(f) I/O Unit model A

M4 terminalfor ground

M3 terminalfor ground (SG)

M4 mount holefor ground

ABU05A, ABU10A ABU05B, ABU10B

Ground the terminals for (ABU05A, ABU05B, ABU10A, ABU10B)

NOTEGround SG terminal to the mount hole.


36

The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices areturned on or off.This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuitsto be disturbed.To reduce the pulse voltage, use a spark killer for an AC device or a diodefor a DC device.

Notes on selecting the spark killer

Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. Thistype of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUCtherefore recommends a CR spark killer.)

The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shallconform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DCresistance of the stationary coil:

1) Resistance (R): Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil

2) Capacitance (C):12

10to 12

20(mF)

CREquivalent circuit of thespark killer

AC relay

Motor

Spark killer

Spark killer

3.6.4Noise Suppressor


37

The CNC cables that require shielding should be clamped by the methodshown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support andproper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,follow this cable clamp method.Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp bythe plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. Metal fittings for clamp areattached to the control unit. The ground plate must be made by themachine tool builder, and set as follows :

Ground plate

Cable

Metal fittings for clamp

40 m

m to

80

mm

Fig. 3.6.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)

3.6.5Cable Clamp andShield Processing


38

Machine sideinstallationboard

Control Rack

Ground plate

Metal fittingsfor clamp

Shield cover

Fig. 3.6.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Ground terminal(grounded)

Hole for securing metal fitting clampMount screw hole

Fig. 3.6.5 (c) Ground plate

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surfaceis plated with nickel.


39

20mm

12mm

8mm Ground plate

Fig. 3.6.5 (d) Ground plate holes Ground plate

(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

6mm

28mm

17mm

Max. 55mm

Fig. 3.6.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clampA02B–0118–K001 (5 pieces)

NOTESelect cables of appropriate length.We do not recommend using cables longer than necessary.Such cables may demonstrate poor resistance to electricalnoise or be influenced by electrical noise. Also, if excesscable is wrapped up in a coil, this may increase impedance.This may induce an extremely high voltage during ON/OFFswitching of signals, or lead to erroneous operation causedby malfunction or electrical noise.


40

Printed circuit boards used for control of Series 15–B is mounted in a rackequipped with several slots.

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Option board

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ


Optionboard

ÃÃ


Option board

Option boardRISCMMC–IIMMC–IIGraphic

MMC–IIIMMC–IVOSI ethernet

ÃÃ


Option 1board

Graphic dis-play control

Communica-tion control(Remote buffer)(DNC 1)

ÃÃ


Sub board

SUB CPU

4–axis controlspindle ( 2)Analog I/OHDI 4RS232CRS422

ÃÃÃÃ


Main CPUboard

CNC CPU

4–axis controlspindle ( 2)CRT/MDIRS232C 2HDI 4MPG 3

ÃÃ


PMC board

PMC CPUI/O LINKMemory Card

Conversioncontrol

ÃÃÃÃ


Power supplyunit

ON/OFFcontrol

Power supply unit

AI or BI

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

OPTION BASIC

F–BUS

MAINCPU

PSUPMC MAINCPU

PSUPMC MAINCPU

PSUPMC MAINCPU

PSUPMC

Fig. 3.7.1 (a) Control unit configuration of Series 15–B

NOTEThe SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

3.7CONTROL UNIT

3.7.1Configuration andInstallation of theControl Unit


41

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ




ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ


ÃÃ


Option board RISCMMC–IIMMC–IIGraphic

MMC–IIIMMC–IVOSI ethernet

ÃÃÃÃ


Graphic dis-play control

Communica-tion control(Remote buff-er)(DNC 1)

ÃÃ


SUB CPU

Analog inputHDI 4RS232CRS422

ÃÃ


CNC CPU

CRT/MDIRS232Cx2HDIx4MPGx3

ÃÃ


PMC CPUI/O LINKMemory Card

Conversioncontrol

ÃÃ


ON/OFFcontrol

Power supply unit

AI or BI

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

OPTION BASIC

F–BUS

MAINCPU

PSUPMC MAINCPU

PSUPMC MAINCPU

PSUPMCSUBCPU

SUBCPU

SUBCPU

Option board Option board Option board Option 1board

Sub CPUboard

Main CPUboard

PMC board Power supplyunit

Fig. 3.7.1 (b) Control unit configuration of Series 15–B (Multiple axis)

NOTEThe SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


42

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ


AXES CPUboard

AXES CPU

4–axis controlspindle ( 2)Near zeroMPG 3

ÃÃÃÃ


Buffer board

Buffer

ÃÃ


AXES CPUboard

AXES CPU

4–axis controlspindle ( 2)Near zero

ÃÃÃÃ


Power supplyy unit

ON/OFFcontrol

Power supply unit

AI or BI

ÃÃ

OPTION BASIC

BUFFER

PSUAXESCPU

BUFFER

PSUAXESCPU

BUFFER

PSUAXESCPU

Fig. 3.7.1 (c) Configuration of Series 15–B additional locker used with multiaxis machines

NOTEMore than one axis CPU board may be used, depending onthe system configuration.

The rack consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a backplane PCB. Sincethe rack is provided with built–in fan motors, it does not require theexternal air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes intothe rack from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor, which islocated on the top of the rack. Space as shown in Fig. 3.7.1 (d) must bereserved not to disturb the air flow ((A), (B))The backplane PCB, which is located on the rear side of the rack,interconnects the PCBs installed in the rack. It has another connectorwhich appears at the left side panel of the rack. The connector may be usedin the future. The space (C) for this shall be reserved as shown in Fig.3.7.1 (d).


43

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW unit [mm]

50

250

30

50

172

Fig. 3.7.1 (d)


44

The part program, offset data and system parameters are stored in theCMOS memory of the control unit and they are retained even while themain power is cut off. The power of the memory is backed up by a lithiumbattery which is mounted on the front panel of the power supply unit. Datais retained even while the main power is OFF. The control unit is shippedfrom the factory equipped with the battery.Replace the battery within one week after the “BAT” warning message isdisplayed blinking on the CRT screen indicating lower battery power, orwhen the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC. Otherwise, data inmemory will be lost.A lithium battery is used for the battery. Follow the followingprecautions.

WARNINGIncorrect replacement of the battery may cause anexplosion.Replace only with the specified battery.

Power SupplyUnit front panel

Battery Compartment

Battery inside

Fig. 3.7.2

NOTEThe part program, parameters and variables are stored tonon–volatile memory in the CNC unit. Normally, turning thepower ON and OFF will not cause data in memory to be lost.However, it is conceivable that erroneous operation maydelete data, or important data stored in non–volatile mayhave to be deleted to restore trouble.We recommend backing up data beforehand so that thesystem can be restored quickly in the event that unexpectedtrouble occurs.

3.7.2Battery for MemoryBackup

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

WARNING


45

Before you replace the battery, turn the machine tool (CNC) ON and makean emergency stop.Replacing the battery involves opening the cabinet with the power stillON. So, only personnel trained in maintenance and safety procedures mayreplace batteries.When you open the cabinet to replace the battery, do not touchhigh–voltage circuits indicated by the Ã

ÃÃÃÃÃ

mark and covered withanti–electric shock covers.If the cover becomes loose and you touch a high–voltage circuit, you willbe electrocuted.

(1)Use a lithium battery.When using battery unit A02B–0162–H101 or –H102

Ordering drawing number: A02B–0120–K106When using battery unit A02B–0162–H107 or –H108

Ordering drawing number: A02B–0200–K102

(2)Turn on the 15–B.

(3)Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power supply unit.The case can be removed easily by holding the top and bottom of it andpulling.

Front panel of thepower supply unit

Battery case

Battery

Fig. 3.7.3 (a) Replacing the battery (1)

3.7.3Replacing the Battery


WARNING


46

(4)Remove the connector from the battery.

PC boardconnector

Battery

Cable connector

Front panel of htepower supply unit

Fig. 3.7.3 (b) Replacing the battery (2)

(5)Replace the battery and reconnect the connector.

(6) Install the battery case.

(7)Turn off the Series 15–B.


47

Power supply unit

unit [mm]

Fig. 3.8.1 (a)

(1)Above diagram shows the grid of connector location.Control board may not have all connectors as shown above.For actual connector layout of each board, please see the connectorlayout diagrams in Fig. 3.8.1 (c) – (s).

3.8CABLE LEAD–INDIAGRAM

3.8.1Configuration ofControl UnitConnectors


48

(2)For the power supply unit, please see Fig. 3.8.1 (b–1) and (b–2).

Minislot

unit [mm]

Fig. 3.8.1 (b–1) Power unit connector layoutFor power unit A02B–0162–H101 and –H102


49

Fig. 3.8.1 (b–2) Power unit connector layoutFor power unit A02B–0162–H107 and –H108


50

POS.

FUNCTIONUPPER LINEMARKING

LOWER LINEMARKING

LED INDICATORSMEMORY CARD I/F

SERIAL I/O LINK IOLINK JD1A

Fig. 3.8.1 (c) PMC board


51

UPPER LINEMARKING

LOWER LINEMARKING

SPDL-1 JA7A

POS.

FUNCTIONFUNCTION

SERIAL SPINDLE 1(POSITION CODER–1)

SERVO AMP 1SERVO AMP 2SERVO AMP 3SERVO AMP 4PULSE CODER 1PULSE CODER 2PULSE CODER 3PULSE CODER 4LINEAR SCALE 1LINEAR SCALE 2LINEAR SCALE 3LINEAR SCALE 4

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

LED INDICATORSCRT DISPLAYMDISERIAL PORT 1SERIAL PORT 2MPGHIGH SPEED DI–1

ANALOG OUTAPC BATTERY APCBAT JA4A

Fig. 3.8.1 (d) Main CPU board


52


LOWER LINEMARKING

LED INDICATORS

SERIAL PORT 9SERIAL PORT 4HIGH SPEED DI–2ANALOG INPUTPOSITION CODER–2ANALOG OUT–2APC BATTERY

SERVO AMP 5SERVO AMP 6SERVO AMP 7SERVO AMP 8PULSE CODER 5PULSE CODER 6PULSE CODER 7PULSE CODER 8LINEAR SCALE 5LINEAR SCALE 6LINEAR SCALE 7LINEAR SCALE 8

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (e) SUB board


53


LOWER LINEMARKING

LED INDICATORSCRT DISPLAYRS232C PORT3RS422 PORT1

POS.

With only graphicfunction

With graphicfunction andcommunicationfunction

With only communicationfunction

Fig. 3.8.1 (f) Option 1 board

NOTEThe communication function refers to the remote bufferfunction or DNC1 function.


54


LOWER LINEMARKING

LEDs

Hard disk interface

Floppy disk interface

Graphic bus

POS.

Keyboard interfaceRS–422 interfaceCentronics interfaceRS–232C interface, channel 1RS–232C interface, channel 2

Fig. 3.8.1 (g) MMC– II CPU board

NOTEThe MMC–II CPU (A02B–0120–J202), which requiresthree RS–232C channels, uses JD6 as an RS–232C port.


55


LOWER LINEMARKING

LEDs

Graphic bus

CRT interfaceNot used

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (h) MMC– II graphic board


56

LEDs

VIDEO output (CNC side)

Video input

Serial port 6

Serial port 7

Serial port 8


LOWER LINEMARKING

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (i) MMC– III CPU board


57


LOWER LINEMARKING

LEDs

CRT I/F

MDI I/F

Serial bort 1

Serial bort 2

Manual pulse generator I/F

High DI I/F

Battery backup forboard replacementMultiple axis–Bus

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (j) Multiple main CPU board


58

LEDs

Serial port 9

Serial port 4

High speed DI I/FAnalog input


LOWER LINEMARKING

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (k) Multiple SUB CPU board


59


LOWER LINEMARKING

LEDs

Operation check input 1




Near zero input

Serial spindle 2

Analog spindle 2

APC Battery

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 4

Pulse coder 1

Pulse coder 2

Pulse coder 3

Pulse coder 4

Linear scale 1

Linear scale 2

Linear scale 3

Linear scale 4

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (l) AXIS CPU board


60

LEDs


LOWER LINEMARKING

POS.

Multiple axis–Bus

Fig. 3.8.1 (m) Multiple buffer board


61


LOWER LINEMARKING

LEDs STATUS/ALARM

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

ÃÃ

ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ LEDs LV ALM

Fuse F21 5A


ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (n) RISC board

NOTEThe RISC board cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


62


LOWER LINEMARKING

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

LEDs STATUS/ALARM

NC Video signal input NC CRT JA1B

Video signal output CRT JA1A

Serial port 1 R232–1 JD5F

Serial port 2 R232–2 JD5G

LCD adjustment LCD ADJUST

Floppy disk drive FDD JD8

Parallel keyboard CENTRO JD9

Full keyboard KEYBOARD CD32A

LEDs AL4 (FUSE)LEDs AL5 (POWER)LEDs AL6 (BATTERY)Battery BATTERY BAT2

Mouse MOUSE CD32B

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ


ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (o) MMC– IV board

NOTEThe MMC–IV board cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


63

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

LEDs STATUS/ALARM

Fuse F1 2.0A

10BASE2 I/F 10BASE2 CNX

Switch LOAD

Switch RESTART

Serial port RS–232–C CD29


ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ


ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ


LOWER LINEMARKING

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (p) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE2)

NOTEThe OSI/Ethernet board cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


64


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

LEDs STATUS/ALARM

Fuse F1 2.0A

AUI I/F AUI CD27

Switch LOAD

Switch RESTART

Serial port RS–232–C CD29


ÃÃÃÃÃÃ


ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ



LOWER LINEMARKING

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (q) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE5)

NOTEThe OSI/Ethernet board cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


65


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

LEDs STATUS/ALARM

Fuse F1 2.0A

Ethernet interface AUI CD27

Bult–in HDD access lamp HDD

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ



LOWER LINEMARKING

POS.

Fig. 3.8.1 (r) Data server board


66

LEDs STATUS

Rotary switch SW

LEDs AL 2 1

High–speed serial bus interface HSSB COP7

Mini slot interface JNAM


LOWER LINEMARKING

LEFT LINEMARKING

RIGHT LINEMARKING

Fig. 3.8.1 (s) HSSB interface board


67

3.8.2Cable Lead–in forStand–alone Cabinet A


68

3.8.3Cable Lead–in forStand–alone Cabinet B


69

3.8.4Cable Lead–in forAdditional Cabinet A


70

About

About 130°

3.9MAINTENANCEAREA

3.9.1Maintenance Area forSelf–standing A TypeCabinet


71

About


About 130°

3.9.2Maintenance Area forSelf–standing B TypeCabinet


72

About

About

3.9.3Maintenance Area forAdditional Cabinet A

B–62073E/04 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

73

4 TOTAL CONNECTION

B–62073E/044. TOTAL CONNECTION

74

4.1CONNECTIONDIAGRAM FORSERIES15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, SERIES150–TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF SERIALSPINDLE)

4.1.1Connection Diagramfor Series15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, Series150–TB/MB/TTB (When LCD/MDI Unitwith Built–in GraphicFunctions is not Used)


75

α SERIES

SERIAL

INTERFACE

SPINDLE

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ

2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

4TH SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

SCALE

SERIAL PULSE CODER

1ST SERVOMOTOR

AC100V

AC200V

EMERGENCY STOP

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ1ST SERVO AMP

ÎÎÎÎ

CN1ÎÎÎÎ

6V

APC BATTERY

CONTROL UNIT

Power supply

PMC BOARD

MAIN CPU

SPINDLEMOTOR

200VAC

ÎÎ

To 2ND AMP

HIGH–SPEED DI 4

CN2CN13

ÎÎ

CN11A

CN11B

POSITIONCODER

3

MEMORYCARD

FANUC I/O Link

+24V WHEN 9″ MONOCHROME CRTÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ

JD1AJD1B

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

CP32

24VDC

OPERATOR’SPANEL

POWER MAGNETICS

ON/OFF

CN2

CNK1CN1

CRT/MDIUNIT

AC200V–240V POWERÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑ

RS232–C I/O DEVICEÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

: :

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ÎÎÎ CP61JD1AJD1B

OP PANELINTERFACEUNIT

Î

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

I/O UnitMODEL–A

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

ÎÎ

AC–OUT(CP2)AC–IN(CP1)

AC–OUT(CP3)ON/OFF(CP4)+24V(CP5)+24E(CP6)

MEM CARD(ICMC)

IOLINK(JD1A)

CRT(JA1)MDI(JA2)R232–1(JD5A)R232–2(JD5B)

MPG(JA3)

HDI–1(JA5A)

SPDL–1(JA7A)

APCBAT(JA4A)

AMP1(JV1)

ENC1(JF1)

SCALE1(JF21)

AMP2(JV2)

ENC2(JF2)SCALE2(JF22)AMP3(JV3)ENC3(JF3)

SCALE3(JF23)

AMP4(JV4)ENC4(JF4)SCALE4(JF24)

ÎÎÎÎ

MPG

T1


76

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

SUB BOARD

OPTION 1

CRT(JA1)

To CRT (In case of graphic display)

6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE



AMP2(JV6)ENC2(JF6)

SCALE2(JF26)AMP3(JV7)

AMP4(JV8)ENC4(JF8)

SCALE4(JF28)

ENC3(JF7)

ENC1(JF5)

SCALE1(JF25) ÎÎÎÎ

SCALE

SERIAL PULSECODER

5TH SERVOMOTOR

AC100VAC200V

EMERGENCY STOP

ÎÎ5TH SERVOAMP

CN1ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

AMP1(JV5)

APCBAT(JA4B) 6VÎ

APC BATTERY

ASPDL–2(JA8B)

SPDL–2(JA7B)

ANALOG I/O 4A–IN(JA6)

ÎÎ

RS–232–C I/O DEVICE

R232–9(JD5J)

CONTROL

UNIT

HIGH SPEED DI 4HDI–2(JA5B)

Î RS–422 I/O DEVICE

R422–4(JD6D)

SCALE3(JF27)

RS232–3(JD5C) REMOTE BUFFER (RS–232–C)

RS422–1(JD6A) REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS–422/RS485)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÌÌÑÑÑÑ

PCR 20 connector (20 pins)


AMP connector

Others

T1

NOTESome connections in the above diagram may not beprovided, depending on the system configuration.


77

4.1.2Connection Diagramfor Series15–TB/TTB/MB (When LCD/MDI Unitwith Built–in GraphicFunctions is Used)


78

: :

EMERGENCY STOP

CRT(JA1)

MDI(JA2)

R232–1(JD5A)

R232–2(JD5B)

MPG(JA3)

HDI–1(JA5A)

SPDL–1(JA7A)

APCBAT

(JA4A)

POWER SUPPLY

MPG

AC–IN (CP1)AC–OUT(CP2)AC–OUT(CP3)ON/OFF(CP4)+24V(CP5)+24E(CP6)

PMC BOARD

ON/OFFCP5JN1

JA2

RS232C I/O DEVICE

HIGH SPEED DI 4

CN1

1ST SERVO AMP

SCALE

1ST SERVOMOTOR

T1AC100VAC200V


ÔÔÌÏÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

Ì

ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

ÌÌ

ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

AC200V–240V POWER

MEM CARD (CNMC)

IOLINK (JD1A)

ÏÌMEMORYCARD

ÌÌFANUC I/O Link

CP61JD1AJD1B


ÌÌÌ

OPERA-TOR’SPANEL

POWERMAGNETICS

JD1AJD1BCP32

I/O UnitMODEL–AÌÌ

ÌÌ

24VDC

3

ÌÌ

α SERIES SERIALINTERFACESPINDLE

2ND AMP

CN2

JA7BJA7A

ÌÌÌÌÌÌ

POSITIONCODER

SPINDLEMOTOR

200VAC

APC BATTERY

ÌÌÌÌ

6V

LCD withgraphic function

MDICNK2

CNK1

MAIN CPU

SERIAL PULSE CODER



CONTROL UNIT

AMP1(JV1)

ENC1(JF1)

SCALE1(JF21)





79

5TH SERVO AMP

SUB BOARD

R232–9(JD5J)ÌÌÌÌÌÌ

RS–232–C I/O DEVICEÌÌÌÌÌÌ

RS–422 I/O DEVICE

ANALOG I/O 4

HIGH SPEED DI 4ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

R422–4(JD6D)

A–IN(JA6)

HDI–2 (JA5B)

SPDL–2 (JA7B)

ASPDL–2(JA8B)

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ EMERGENCY STOP

CN1

APC BATTERY

SERIAL PULSECODER

5TH SERVOMOTOR

SCALE

T1AC100VAC200V

6TH AXISSERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

6VAPCBAT(JA4B)

AMP1(JV5 )

ENC1(JF5 )

SCALE1(JF25)

AMP2(JV6 )

ENC2(JF6 )

SCALE2(JF26)

AMP3(JV7 )

ENC3(JF7 )

SCALE3(JF27)

AMP4(JV8 )

ENC4(JF8 )

SCALE4(JF28)



CONTROL UNIT

ÌÌÑ



AMP connector

Others



80

4.2CONNECTIONDIAGRAM FORSERIES15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, SERIES150–TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OFANALOG SPINDLE)


81

ÑÑ


Ì

POWER SUPPLY

AC–IN(CP1)AC–OUT(CP2)AC–OUT(CP3)ON/OFF(CP4)

+24V(CP5)+24E(CP6)

ÑÑ

PMC BOARD

MEM CARD(CNMC)

IOLINK(JD1A)

MAIN CPUCRT(JA1)MDI(JA2)

R232–1(JD5A)R232–2(JD5B)

MPG(JA3)

HDI–1(JA5A)

SPDL–1(JA7A)

ASPDL–1(JA8A)

APCBAT(JA4A)

AMP1(JV1)

ENC1(JF1)

SCALE1(JF21)


AMP3(JV3)ENC3(JF3)

SCALE3(JF23)


ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

Ì

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

Ì

ÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

Ì

APC BATTERY

6V

MEMORYCARD

CN1

100VAC200VAC

1ST SERVOMOTOR

SERIAL PULSECODER

SCALE



T11STSERVO AMP

ANALOGINTERFACESPINDLE

200VAC

HIGH SPEED DI 4

SPINDLEMOTOR

POSITIONCODER

ÓÓ

MPG 3

RS232C I/O DEVICE

ÌÌÌÌÌÌ

JD1AJD1BCP32

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

CP61JD1AJD1B


OPER-ATOR’SPANEL

I/O UnitMODEL–A

POWERMAGNET-ICS

: :

ON/OFFCN2CN1

CNK1ÌÌ

CRT/MDIUNIT

AC200V–240VPOWER

24VDC

+24V WHEN 9″MONOCHROME CRT

EMERGENCY STOP

CN2

FANUC I/O Link

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

CONTROL

UNI

T


82


SUB BOARD

R232–9(JD5J)

R422–4(JD6D)

A–IN(JA6)HDI–2(JA5B)

SPDL–2(JA7B)

ASPDL–2(JA8B)

APCBAT(JA4B)

AMP1(JV5)

ENC1(JF5)

SCALE1(JF25)


AMP3(JV7)ENC3(JF7)

SCALE3(JF27)


OPTION–1

CRT(JA1)

RS232–3(JD5C)

RS422–1(JD6A)

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

Ì

ÌÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

APC BATTERY

6V

CN1

AC100VAC200V

5TH SERVOMOTOR

SERIAL PULSECODER

SCALE



T15THSERVO AMP

RS–422 I/O DEVICE

EMERGENCY STOP

RS–232–C I/O DEVICE

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

To CRT (in case of graphic display)

ANALOG I/O 4HIGH SPEED DI 4

ÌÌ

REMOTE BUFFER (RS232–C)

Ì REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ


200VAC

SPINDLEMOTOR

POSITIONCODER

Ì

ÌÌ

Ì

Ì

ÌÑÑ



AMP connector

Others

CONTROL

UNI

T



83

4.3CONNECTIONDIAGRAM FORSERIES 15–MB ORSERIES 150–MB (IN CASE OFMULTIPLE AXIS)


84

ÑÑ

Ò

POWER SUPPLYAC–IN(CP1)

AC–OUT(CP2)

AC–OUT(CP3)ON/OFF(CP4)

+24V(CP5)+24E(CP6)

ÑÑ

PMC BOARD

MEM CARD(CNMC)

I/O LINK(JD1A)

MAIN CPU BOARDCRT(JA1)MDI(JA2)

R232–1(JD5A)R232–2(JD5B)

MPG(JA3)HDI–1(JA5A)

MAX BUS(JNC)

SUB CPU BOARDR232–9(JD5J)

R422–4(JD6D)

A–IN(JA6)

HDI–2(JA5B)

OPTION–1 BOARD

CRT(JA1)

RS232–3(JD5C)

RS422–1(JD6A)

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

Ò

ÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒ

MEMORYCARD

HIGH SPEED DI 4

ÓÓÓÓÓÓ

3

RS232C I/O DEVICE

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

JD1AJD1BCP32

ÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒ

CP61JD1AJD1B


OPERA-TOR’SPANEL

I/O UnitMODEL–A

POWERMAGNETICS

: :

CN2CN1CNK1ÒÒÒ

CRT/MDIUNIT

ON/OFF

24VDC

+24V WHEN 9″ MONOCHROME CRT

FANUC I/O Link

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ÒÒ

CPD1CPD2B

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

INPUTUNIT

CPD2A

200 to240VACPOWER

ÒÒÒÒ

RS232C I/O DEVICE

ÒÒRS422 I/O DEVICE

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ANALOG INPUT 4HIGH SPEED DI 4

To CRT (in case of graphic display)

REMOTE BUFFER (RS232–C)

REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)

TO ADDITIONAL CABINET (BUFFER BOARD “JNC”)

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ

CONTROL

UNI

T

ÌÌÑÑ



AMP connector

Others


4.3.1Control Unit


85

2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE


1ST CPU BOARD

SPDL–1(JA7A)

ASPDL–1(JA8A)

APCBAT(JA4)

AMP1(JV1)

ENC1(JF1)

SCALE1(JF21)

AMP2(JV2)ENC2(JF2)

SCALE2(JF22)AMP3(JV3)ENC3(JF3)

SCALE3(JF23)

AMP4(JV4)ENC4(JF4)

SCALE4(JF24)

ADDS1(JF61)

ADDS2(JF62)

ADDS3(JF63)

ADDS4(JF64)

NZ/ZD(JA16)

ÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒ

Ò

ÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

Ò

APC BATTERY

6V

CN1

AC100VAC200V

1ST SERVOMOTOR

SERIAL PULSECODER

SCALE

T1

1ST SERVO AMP

ÒÒÒÒÒ


α SERIESSERIALINTERFACE

SPINDLE200VAC

SPINDLEMOTOR

POSITION CODER

EMERGENCY STOP

CN2

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

CPD1CPD2C

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

INPUTUNIT

BUFFER BOARDMAX BUS(JNC) To control unit (Main CPU board “JNC”)

2ND CPU BOARD

3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE


TO 2ND AMP

JA7BJA7A

1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒ

2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒ

3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒÒÒ

4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒÒÒ

Reference position approach signalÒÒÒÒ

More than one axis CPU board may be used, dependingon the system configuration.

ÒÒÒÒ

ÌÌÑ



AMP connector

Others

ADDITIONAL

CABINET

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

4.3.2Additional Cabinet (In Case of SerialSpindle Interface)


86


4.3.3Additional Cabinet (In Case of AnalogSpindle Interface)


87

ADDITIONAL

CABINET

2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE


1ST CPU BOARD

SPDL–1(JA7A)

ASPDL–1(JA8A)

APCBAT(JA4)

AMP1(JV1)

ENC1(JF1)

SCALE1(JF21)

AMP2(JV2)ENC2(JF2)

SCALE2(JF22)AMP3(JV3)ENC3(JF3)

SCALE3(JF23)

AMP4(JV4)ENC4(JF4)

SCALE4(JF24)

ADDS1(JF61)

ADDS2(JF62)

ADDS3(JF63)

ADDS4(JF64)

NZ/ZD(JA16)

ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒ


Ò

ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒ

APC BATTERY

6V

CN1

AC100VAC200V

1ST SERVOMOTOR

SERIAL PULSECODER

SCALE

T1

1ST SERBO AMP


200VAC

SPINDLEMOTOR

POSITIONCODER

EMERGENCY STOP

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ

CPD1CPD2C

ÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

INPUT T UNIT

BUFFER BOARDMAX BUS(JNC) To control unit (Main CPU board “JNC”)

2ND CPU BOARD

3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE


1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒ

2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒÒÒ

3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒÒÒ

4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTORÒÒÒÒ

Reference position approach signalÒÒ

More than one axis CPU board may be used, dependingon the system configuration.

ÌÌÑÑÑÑ



AMP connector

Others

ÒÒÒ



88

Instead of the two flat cables employed by the F15–A (used with multiaxismachines), a 96–core cable is used to connect the control unit to theadditional locker. The cable length, however, is the same as that of theF15–A (1.5 m).

1.5–m 96–core cable (supplied by FANUC)Specification: A02B–0162–K821

4.3.4Connection Betweenthe Control Unit andAdditional Locker


89


AC–OUT(CP2)


+24V(CP5)

ÑÑÑÑ

Main CPU BOARDMDI(JA2)

200–240VAC POWERSUPPLY

KEYBOARD UNIT

ÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ON/OFFCN2CN1

CNK1ÒÒÒÒ

CRT/MDIUNIT

MMC–II

GRAPHIC BOARD

CRT(JA1)

PW2JD7A

JD7B

HARDDISKUNIT

CASSETTESTREAMER UNITJD7B

JD7A

SCSI terminator

ÒÒ

Ò

MMC–II

MAIN CPU BOARD

HDD(JD7)

FDD(JD8)

CENTRO(JD9)

RS422(JD6)

R232–1(JD5A)R232–2(JD5B)

KEY(JD5C)

ÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒ

FLOPPY DISKJD8 PW1

PW1

PRINTER

EXTENSIONADAPTER UNITJD5

JA1

CD14CA38

ÒÒÒÒ

CENTRONICS

(Note 2) RS422 I/O DEVICE

RS232C I/O DEVICE

RS232C I/O DEVICERS232C I/O DEVICE

CONTROL

UNIT

ÌÌÌÌÑÑÑÑ



AMP connector

Others

4.4CONNECTIONDIAGRAM FORSERIES 15–B (INCASE OF MMC–II )


90

NOTE1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMC–II and peripheral devices. For

details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.2 The MMC–II CPU (A02B–0120–J202), which requires three RS–232C channels, uses JD6 as

an RS–232C port.3 The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


91


AC–OUT(CP2)


+24V(CP5)

MINI SLOTEXTERNAL HARD

DISK INTERFACESCSI(JD19)

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

MAIN CPU BOARDMDI(JA2)

AC200V–240V POWERSUPPLY

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ON/OFFCN2CN1

CNK1ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

CRT/MDIUNIT

OPTION 1 BOARD

CRT(JA1)

ÌÌÌ

ÒÒÒÒ

MMC–III CPU

NC CRT(JA1B)

CART(JA1A)

R232–1(JD5F)

R232–2(JD5G)

R232–3(JD5H)

ÒÒ

ÒÒÒ

External hard disk(POKEDY2.5)

(Note 2)

RS232C CHANNEL1

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ÒÒÒÒ

ÒÒÒÒÒÒ

RS232C CHANNEL2

ÒÒÒ RS232C CHANNEL3

(Note 2)

CONTROL

UNIT

ÌÌÑÑÑÑ



AMP connector

Others (connection to externalhard disk–3M MDR connector)

NOTE1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMC–III and peripheral devices. For

details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.2 Used for application download only.3 The MMC–III board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

4.5CONNECTIONDIAGRAM FORSERIES 15–B (INCASE OF MMC–III )


92

ŠŠŠON/OFFCN2

CN1

CNK1

CRT/MDIUNIT

AC200V–240VPOWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLYAC–IN (CP1)

AC–OUT (CP2)

AC–OUT (CP3)

ON/OFF (CP4)

+24V (CP5)

ŠŠŠ

ŠŠ

ŠŠŠŠ

ŠŠ

ŠŠŠŠ

ŠŠŠŠŠ

ŠŠŠŠ

ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ

MAIN CPU BOARDMDI (JA2) ÌÌÌ

Option 1 BOARD

CRT (JA1) ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

MMC–IV CPUNC CRT (JA1B)

CRT (JA1A)

R232–1 (JD5F)

R232–2 (JD5G)

FDD (JD8)

CENTRO (JD9)

EX KEY (JD21)

KEYBOARD (CD32A)

MOUSE (CD32B)

ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌ

ÌÌÌÌ

ÌÌÌ

RS232C I/O DEVICE

FLOPPY DISK UNIT

JD8 PW1 AC100V IN*

PRINTER POWERSUPPLY

*

CUSTOM KEYBOARD

*

FULL KEYBOARD*

MOUSE*

ÌÌŠŠ

: PCR20 connector (20 pins)

: AMP connector

: Others

CONTROL

UNIT

4.6CONNECTIONDIAGRAM FORMMC–IV


93

NOTE1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMC–IV and peripheral devices. For

details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.2 Devices marked by an asterisk “*” are used only for application download only. These devices

cannot be used for incorporating units.3 The MMC–IV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

B–62073E/045. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT

UNIT CONNECTION

94

5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION


UNIT CONNECTION

95

CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)

F2 (AC INPUT FUSE)

CP3 (AC OUTPUT)

Key location

PIL (PILOT LAMP)

ALM (ALARM LAMP)

CP4 (POWER CONTROL)6–pin connector

CP6 (+24E OUTPUT)

F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)F3 (+24V FUSE 3.2A)

CP5 (+24V OUTPUT)

CP8 (BATTERY)

CP2 (AC OUTPUT)

F1 (AC INPUT FUSE)

Fig. 5.1 (a) For power unit A02B–0162–H101 or –H102

CAUTIONConnector compatibility

CP1CP2CP3CP4CP5CP6

COMPATIBLEINCOMPATIBLE (key groove on the connector

prevents erroneous connection)

5.1POWER SUPPLYUNIT PANEL LAYOUT


UNIT CONNECTION

96

CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)

G

S

R

3

2

1

G

200B

200A

3

2

1

G

200B

200A

3

2

1

+VB

0V

1

2

0V

+24V

3

2

1

0V

+24E

3

2

1

FB

FA

AL

B3

B2

B1

COM

OFF

ON

A3

A2

A1

F3 (+24V FUSE)AI 3.2ABI 5.0A

CP3 (AC OUTPUT)

Key location

PIL (PILOT LAMP)

CP6 (+24E FUSE 5A)

F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)

CP5 (+24V OUTPUT)

CP8 (BATTERY)

CP2 (AC OUTPUT)

F1 (AC INPUTFUSE)

ALM (ALARM LAMP)

CP4 (POWER CONTROL)6–pin connector

Fig. 5.1 (b) For power unit A02B–0162–H107 or –H108

CAUTIONConnector compatibility

CP1CP2CP3CP4CP5CP6

COMPATIBLE

INCOMPATIBLE(key groove on theconnector preventserroneous connection)


UNIT CONNECTION

97

The power supply unit of the Series 15–B has the power on/off controlfunction. The power supply unit of the Series 15–B therefore does notneed an input unit, which is necessary for the power supply unit of theSeries 15–A, to control power on/off.

NOTEWhen an input unit is not used, the capacity and the numberof connectors of the AC outputs for which power on/off iscontrolled are shown in the figure below. When the capacityor the number of connectors is insufficient, see section5.2.3.

5.2CONNECTING THEPOWER SUPPLYUNIT

5.2.1When an Input Unit isnot Used


UNIT CONNECTION

98

AMP (Japan)2–178288–3 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)

AMP (Japan)1–178288–33 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)

9″ monochrome CRT (only 1 unit)9″ PDP9.5″ LCD10.4″ LCD

(1)CP1The AC input connector for the control unit. The AC inputspecifications are as follows:R and S: 200 to 240 VAC +10%/–15%, 1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz " 3 HzG: Grounding (class 3 or better)

NOTEThe above specifications may be limited depending on thedevice powered from CP2 or CP3.

(2)CP2 and CP3The connectors for AC outputs for which power on/off is synchronizedwith the power on/off of the control unit.The AC output specifications are the same as the AC input for CP1.The AC input specifications for CP1 may be limited depending on theAC input specifications for a device connected to CP2 or CP3.


UNIT CONNECTION

99

Example) When a device of 200/220 VAC (which does not accept 240V) is connected to CP2, the AC input specification for CP1is also 200/220 VAC.

The total AC output from CP2 and CP3 is up to 2.5 A.When the capacity is insufficient, see section 5.2.3.

(3)CP4The connector for controlling the power. The power–on andpower–off buttons are connected here.

(a) Power on/off (EON, EOF, and COM)Turns on and off the power to the control unit.

(Time conditions)

Between EON and COM

TON TOFON

ShortedOpen

Between EOF andCOM

TOFF

(Power is on.) (Power is off.) (power is on.)

TON y 500msec

TOFF y 500msec

TOFON y 5secShortedOpen

(Contact specifications)Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between the contacts)Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (The minimum load is 2mA or lower.)

(b)Alarm input (AL and OFF)Receives an alarm signal from outside the control unit to turn offthe power to the system. Input a contact signal which is closedwhen an alarm occurs.

(Contact specifications)Withstand voltage: 30 VDC or more (between the contacts)Withstand current: 100 mA or more (The minimum load is 1mA or less.)

(c) Alarm output (FA and FB) Shorts FA and FB when an abnormality is found in the powersupply unit for the control unit, for example, when the fuse fordirect current output blows or when an excessive voltage or currentis detected at the direct current output. When an alarm input(between AL and OFF) is closed, FA and FB are also shorted. Thissignal is held until the power–off button is pressed or the inputpower (AC input of the power supply unit) is turned off. When thissignal is output, the power to the control unit is turned off and thepower–on button is disabled.

(Contact ratings) 50 VDC or less0.5 A or less50 VAC or less5 VA or less

(4)CP5+24 VDC power outputConnector for +24 VDC power displays (9″ CRT/PDP, 9.5″ LCD,10.4″ LCD)


UNIT CONNECTION

100

(5)CP6The connector for the +24 VDC power output for the machineinterface I/O (connection unit, operator’s panel connection unit, etc.).The DC output supplied from CP6 is up to 3 A.

The power supply unit of the Series 15–B has the power on/off controlfunction. However, when an external input unit is used, the power–on andpower–off buttons may not be connected to the power supply unit. In thiscase, the following connection is recommended. The signals ON, OFF,and COM are wired together. This means that the power supply unitoperates while its AC input power is supplied to CP1.

(1)For other than multiaxis machines

CP1 (Input of 200 to 240 VAC) AMP (Japan)1–178128–3

External input unit

200 to 240 VAC1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power–onandpower–offbuttons

AMP (Japan)2–178129–6

CP4 (Power control)

NOTEAs shown in the above figure, when external input unitA14B–0076–B001 is used, the number of AC outputconnectors for which power on/off is controlled increasesbut the capacity of the AC input fuse in the input unit and thatin the power supply unit is the same (10 A for power supplyB1). This input unit therefore cannot be used in order toincrease the capacity of the AC output for which poweron/off is controlled.

5.2.2When an Input Unit isUsed


UNIT CONNECTION

101

When the A14B–0076–B001 is used as an input unit, connect the inputunit to the power supply unit as shown below.

X

TP2

CP2

(6P, black)

PA

PB

R

S

G

R, S, G

Magnetic contactor

0.3A

200/220 VAC with poweron/off controlled

ON

OFF

TP1

EON

EOF

COM

FA

FB

CP1 Series 15–B

200 to 240 VAC1f

The input unit is within the dotted lines.

TP1 and TP2: M4 screw terminals

U, V, W Servothree–phase input

Fuses

To servotransformer

CP2–1

CP2–2

CP2–3

CP1–1

CP1–2

CP1–3

CP2–6

CP2–5

200 to 240 VAC with poweron/off controlled

Notused

MCC

XX

Y Y

NOTERefer to the Series 15–A Connection Manual for details ofthe input unit connectors.


UNIT CONNECTION

102

(2)For multiaxis machinesWhen using multi–axis machines, be sure to use the input unit as twopower supply units are controlled.When A14B–0076–B401 (15–MB for multiaxis machines) is used asthe input unit, it is connected to the power unit as follows:

FA15–MODEL B Multipleaxis input unit

FS15–MODEL B Maincabinet

Power supply unitCPI (AC input)

CP4 (Power supplycontrol)

FS15–MODEL B Additionalcabinet

Power supply unitCPI (AC input)

CP4 (Power supplycontrol)

POWERBUTTONON

POWERBUTTON OFF

ALARM INPUT

ALARM OUTPUT

HOUSING

CONTACTAMP (JAPAN)

CPDI (AC output)

CPD2B (Power supplycontrol)

CPD2C (Power supplycontrol)

CPD2A (Power supplycontrol)

(Note)


UNIT CONNECTION

103

Through the CP2 and CP3 connectors, the power supply unit can outputa total AC current of up to 2.5 A subject to power on/off is control. When the number of connectors or the capacity of the output from thepower unit is insufficient, the following connection is recommended:

10A

M4 screwterminalsCP3 (AC output)

Pin assignment layout for theCP92 to CP96 connectors

200 to 240 VAC with poweron/off controlled

200 to 240 VAC, 1f

Power supply unit

3

2

1

R SG

200B

200A

AMP (Japan)

1–178128–3 (Housing)

1–175218–5 (Contact)

FCI Japan

SMS3PWS–5 (Housing)

RC16M–SCT3 (Contact)

Ground

Expanded power input unit

CP913

2

1

G

200B

200A

CP92 CP93 CP94 CP95 CP96

FCI Japan

SMS3PWS–5 (Housing)

RC16M–SCT3 (Contact)

Expanded input unit : A14B–0076–B209

3

2

1

G

200B

200A

Y Y

5.2.3When AC OutputTerminals for WhichPower On/Off isControlled areInsufficient


UNIT CONNECTION

104

Power ON the power supplies in the following order or simultaneously:

1 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool2 Power supply (I/O Unit–MODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O

devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)for servo amplifier

3 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit

Leave the memory backup battery and separate absolute pulse coderbattery connected regardless of the ON/OFF state of the control unitpower supply. If these batteries are removed with the control unit turnedOFF, parameters, part programs, pulse coder position data and other datastored on the control unit will be lost.For details, see “3.7.3 Replacing the battery.”

Power OFF the power supplies in the following order:

1 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit2 Power supply (I/O Unit–MODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O

devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)for servo amplifier

3 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool

The motor cannot be controlled when the power is turned OFF or if apower interruption occurs. Adopt the required corrective action on themachine tool for trouble that arises from the inability to control the motor.For example, insert a brake to prevent the shaft from falling when the shaftoperating in the gravity shaft direction is being controlled. The brakeclamps the motor when the servo has not started up or when the motor isnot operating, and unclamps the motor only while it is operating. In otherwords, the servo motor is normally clamped when a power OFF or powerinterruption prevents servo axis control. The axis being controlled mayfall in the time up to activation of the motor clamp relay. So, you mustevaluate whether or not the amount that the axis falls is a problem.

NOTEWhen the MMC–IV and intelligent terminal are used, shutdown the OS before you turn the control unit OFF. If thepower is turned OFF during accessing of the hard disk orwhile the operating system is still running, data on the harddisk is more likely to be damaged. Avoid this at all costs.

5.2.4Power ON Sequence

5.2.5Power OFF Sequence


UNIT CONNECTION

105

Input PCB Input fuse for servo amp.

Input fuse for control unit

Input Unit(A14B–0076–B004, B005, B008)

(1)Terminal Unit TP1

AC200/220V 3f 60Hzor AC200V 3f 50Hz

GND

U V W

M5 screw Terminal ×4

These terminals are for AC power input. The cabinet must beequipped with a breaker or fuse to protect the wiring againstover–currents. Provide a ground of class 3 or higher.

5.3CONNECTION OFINPUT UNIT FORSTANDALONECABINET A

5.3.1Input Unit Layout

5.3.2Connection to Input Units(A14B–0076–B004,–B005, and –B008)


UNIT CONNECTION

106


EON EOF COM

FA

FB


(a) EON, EOF, COM : External power supply ON/OFF TerminalThe external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off thepower supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is asfollows:

EON

EOF

COM

Input unitPOWERON

POWEROFF

Remove this connection.

External power supply ON/OFF Signal

The following figure shows the timing chart according to which theexternal power is turned on and off.

EON–COM

EOF–COM

Tofon

ToffTon

(Power ON) (Power OFF)

Ton y 500msecToff y 500msec

Tofon y 5sec

The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal

The contacts used for turning on and off the external power mustconform to the following specifications:

Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (with minimum load of2 mA or lower)


UNIT CONNECTION

107

(b)FA and FB: Fuse alarm signalA short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in thepower unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent isdetected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are alsoshort–circuited if an alarm signal is input from CP6. The fusealarm signal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NCis turned off or the OFF button is pressed. When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and thePOWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons are disabled.The connection is as follows:

Input Unit

FA

FB

Contact voltage ratingDC 50V or lowerDC 0.5V or lowerAC 50V or lowerAC 5VA or lower

Fuse alarm signal


R SEMGIN1


EXR

EXSEMGIN2

EMGOUT1

EMGOUT2

(a) R and SThese terminals are used for single–phase 200–VAC input to thecontrol unit. The connection is normally as follows:

R S U V W

F1

F2

TP4 TP1

Remove this connection when using separate sources for thethree–phase AC input (for the servo amplifier) and thesingle–phase 200 VAC input (for the control unit).


UNIT CONNECTION

108

(b)EMGIN1, 2 Note 1)Connect to the 100–VAC (MCC) terminals of the servo amplifier,as shown below:

Standalone cabinet

EMGIN1

EMGIN2

To MCC terminals ofthe servo amplifier inthe standalone cabinet

Prepare an external 100–VAC powersource, and connect in series with theemergency stop contactor.

AC100 V Emergency stop

(c) EMGOUT1, 2Not used.

(d)EXR and EXS (Note)These terminals are for ON/OFF–controlled, single–phase200/220 VAC output. Connect this output to an electromagneticcontactor such that the servo amplifier power source, installedoutside the cabinet, can be turned on and off together with the NCpower. The current must not exceed 0.3 mA.

NOTEThese terminals are used to connect the additional cabinetwhen use of the timing control cable (A02B–0163–J101) isspecified. In this case, two cables may be connected to oneterminal.

(4)Connector CP4When the cabinet is equipped with a built–in tape reader, this terminalis connected to the tape reader at the factory. When the tape reader isinstalled outside the cabinet, this terminal is used for power input.


UNIT CONNECTION

109

The following units can be mounted in the standalone cabinet. Necessarycontrol unit PCB connections are completed at the factory.

Unit PCB Connector Function Remark

9″ monochromeCRT unit

PSU MAIN MAIN

CP5 JA1 JA2

DC24V CRT MDI

Note 1)

Connection unit PSU PMC

CP6 JD1A

DC24E IOLINK

Note 2)

Tape reader MAIN JD5B RS232–2

Punch panel MAIN JD5A RS232–1

APC battery (1 pc only)

MAIN JA4A APCBAT

Servo amp. MAINSUB

JV1 to 4JV5 to 8

AMP1 to 4AMP5 to 8

Note 3)

PSU : Power supply unitMAIN :Main CPU boardPMC: PMC boardSUB : Sub board

NOTE1 Can be used for power input when the 9″ monochrome CRT

unit is installed outside the cabinet.2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is

installed outside the cabinet.3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the

ordered specifications.

5.3.3Connection to theControl Unit


UNIT CONNECTION

110

Input Unit (A14B–0076–B411)

5.4CONNECTION OFINPUT UNIT FORSTANDALONECABINET B



UNIT CONNECTION

111

(1)Terminal Unit TB2 (M4 terminal)

(a) R, SThese terminals are for single–phase 200/220 VAC input to devicesto which power is supplied from the control unit (main andadditional lockers) and the input unit.

(b)200A, 200B Note)These terminals are for ON/OFF–controlled, single–phase200/220 VAC output. Connect these terminals to anelectromagnetic contactor such that the servo amplifier powersource, installed outside the cabinet, can be turned on and offtogether with the NC power.

NOTEThese terminals are used to connect the additional cabinetwhen use of the timing control cable (A02B–0163–J101) isspecified.

(c) INT1. INT2 Note)These are the door interlock terminals, used for cabinets other thanstandalone cabinet B. When the two terminals are open, the NCpower is off.

NOTEThese terminals are used to connect the additional cabinetwhen use of the timing control cable (A02B–0163–J101) isspecified.

(d)EON, EOF, COM1 : External power ON/OFF terminalThe external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off thepower supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is asfollows:

EON

EOF

COM

Input unitPOWERON

POWEROFF

Remove this connection.

External power supply ON/OFF Signal

The following figure shows the timing chart according to which theexternal power is turned on and off.

5.4.2Connection to InputUnit (A14B–0076–B411)


UNIT CONNECTION

112

EON–COM

EOF–COM

Tofon

ToffTon

(Power ON) (Power OFF)

Ton y 500msecToff y 500msecTofon y 5msec

The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal

The contacts used for turning on and off the external power mustconform to the following specifications:

Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)Withstand current: 100 mA or higher

(with minimum load of 2 mA or lower)

(e) EMGPIT1. 2Not used.

(f) 200R1, 200S1, and COM2These terminals are for input unit internal connections.

(2)Terminal unit TB3 (Faston terminal)This is the door interlock terminal used for standalone cabinet B. Theterminal is used when use of the door interlock (A02B–0116–J001) isspecified.

(3)PCB1 (A17B–1600–0580)

(a) Connector CPD1 (AMP housing: 1–178128–3, contact:1–175218–5)This terminal is used to supply single–phase 200/220 VAC to themain and additional lockers. These connections are made at thefactory.

(b)Connecter CPD2A(A1 to A3: AMP Housing 2–178128–3, Contact 1–175218–2)(B1 to B3: AMP Housing 2–178128–3, Contact 1–175218–2)

A1 ON B1 AL

A2 OFF B2 FA

A3 COM B3 FB

ON, OFF, COM (A1 to A3)These terminals are connected at the factory.


UNIT CONNECTION

113

FA, FB: Fuse alarm output signal (B1 to B3)A short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in thepower unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent isdetected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are alsoshort–circuited if an alarm signal is input from AL. The fuse alarmsignal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NC isturned off or the OFF button is pressed. When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and thePOWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons areinvalidated. The connection is as follows:

Input Unit

FA

FB

Contact voltage ratingDC 50V or lowerDC 0.5V or lowerAC 50A or lowerAC 5VAor lower

Fuse alarm signal

(c) Connector CPD2B (AMP Housing 2–178129–6, Contact1–175218–2)This terminal is used for the control signals that turn on and off themain locker power. The connection to the main cabinet iscompleted at the factory.

(d)Connector CPD2C (AMP Housing 2–178129–6, Contact1–175218–2)This terminal is for the control signals that turn on and off theadditional locker power. The connection to the additional cabinetis completed at the factory.

(4)PCB2 (A20B–1001–0210)CP91 to CP96 (connector: FCI Japan, housing: SMS3PK–5, contact:RC16M–23T3 or RC16M–SCT3)

(a) Connector CP91This terminal is for ON/OFF–controlled, single–phase 200/220VAC input. This connection is completed at the factory.

(b)Connector CP92This terminal is connected to the 200A and 200B terminals ofterminal unit TB2.

(c) Connector CP93This terminal is for power supply (120 W) to the cooling fan of thestand–alone cabinet.

(d)Connector CP94When the cabinet is equipped with a built–in tape reader, thisterminal is connected to the tape reader at the factory. When thetape reader is installed outside the cabinet, this terminal is used forpower input.

Power requirement of built–in tape reader: 110 VA (without reel)130 VA (with reel)


UNIT CONNECTION

114

(e) Connector CP95, CP96These terminals are for ON/OFF–controlled, single–phase200/220 VAC output. They are used for power supply to externalunits. The rating of each terminal must be set such that the total ofthe ratings of CP92 to PC96 does not exceed 1.4 kVA.

The following units can be mounted in stand–alone cabinet B andadditional lockers. All necessary PCB connections in the control unit (ofthe main and additional lockers) are completed at the factory.

Unit Lockers PCB Connector Function Remark

9″ monochrome CRT unit MAINMAINMAIN

PSU MAIN MAIN

CP5 JA1 JA2

DC24V CRT MDI

Note 1)

Connection unit MAINMAIN

PSU PMC

CP6 JD1A

DC24E IOLINK

Note 2)

Tape reader MAIN MAIN JD5B RS232–2

Punch panel MAIN MAIN JD5A RS232–1

APC battery (1 pc only) ADD MAIN JA4A APCBAT

Servo amp. ADD AXIS JV1 to 4 AMP1 to 4 Note 3)

PSU : Power supply unit

MAIN : Main CPU board

PMC : PMC board

AXIS : Axis CPU board

MAIN : Main Cabinet

ADD : Additional Cabinet

NOTE1 Can be used for power input when the 9″ monochrome CRT

unit is installed outside the cabinet.2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is

installed outside the cabinet.3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the

ordered specifications.

5.4.3Connection to ControlUnit


UNIT CONNECTION

115

ElectromagneticContactor

Fuse for servo amp.

SparkKiller

GNDLC2U V W

SK2

F17 F18 F19

Terminal unit

T1 GNDTA

NOTETerminal unit T1 is not installed when using theA02B–0075–J141 or –J144 input terminal.

5.5CONNECTION OFINPUT UNIT FORADDITIONALCABINET A



UNIT CONNECTION

116

Input unit order drawing numbers and unit drawing numbers

unit order drawing number unit drawing number

A02B–0075–J141, –J144 A02B–0075–C006

A02B–0075–J142, –J145 A02B–0075–C007

(1)Connection of three–phase power for the servo amplifier

Connect the three–phase power forthe servo amplifier to these terminals(M6 screw terminals).

U

1 3 5

2 4 6

V W GND

AC200/220V 3f 60Hz

or AC200V 3f 50Hz

ElectromagneticContactorLC2

FuseF17 to F19

Connected to the line filters or servoterminal units.

Note) Provide a ground ofclass 3 or higher.

(2)Terminal unit T1 (M4 screw terminal)Not used.

(3)Terminal unit TA (M4 screw terminal)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

IN OUT

100V

DOOR INT. LOCKIN OUT

200V

The terminals of the upper row are used for connecting wires inside thecabinet, and those of the lower row are used for connecting externaldevices.

NOTEIn the following text, the terms “previous cabinet” and “nextcabinet” refer to the cabinets shown below:

5.5.2Cable Connection[Connection to theInput Unit(A02B–0075–J141,–J142, –J144, and–J145)]


UNIT CONNECTION

117

Previous cabinet(the cabinetconnected beforethat beingconsidered)




Additionalcabinet

Additionalcabinet

Additionalcabinet

Additionalcabinet

Main cabinet

Next cabinet (thecabinet connectedafter that beingconsidered)




(a) Terminal 1 to 4These terminals are for 100 VAC (MCC) connection for the servoamplifier. The connections are as follows:

These terminals receive100 VAC from the previouscabinet, etc. Depending onthe previous cabinet, theconnection differs asfollows:

These terminalssupply 100 VAC to thenext cabinet.These connections aremade at the factory.

To each servo amplifier in the cabinet

a. When the previous cabinet is an additional cabinet:These connections are made at the factory.

b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and thetiming control cable (A02B–0163–J101) is specified:These connections are made at the factory.

c. When the previous cabinet is stand–alone cabinet B:Prepare an external 100–VAC power source and connect it inseries with the emergency stop contactor, as shown below.


UNIT CONNECTION

118

EMERGENCY stopContactor

AC100 V

(b)Terminal 5 to 8These terminals are for ON/OFF–controlled single–phase 200 JACinput, used for controlling the electromagnetic contactors for thecabinet fan and servo amplifier power. Connections are as follows:

These terminals receive 200VAC from the previouscabinet, etc. Depending onthe previous cabinet, theconnection differs asfollows:

These terminals supply200 VAC to the nextcabinet. Theseconnections are madeat the factory.

N

1 c 2

LC2


b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and thetiming control cable (A02B–0163–J101) is specified:These connections are made at the factory.

c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and thetiming control cable (A02B–0164–J101) is specified:These connections are made at the factory.


UNIT CONNECTION

119

(c) Terminal 9 to 12These terminals are for the door interlock. The connections are asfollows:

When the door interlock(A02B–0075–J052) is specified,these connections are made atthe factory.

These terminals receive the doorinterlock signal from the previouscabinet. Depending on the previouscabinet, the connection differs.

These terminals supply the door interlock signalto the next cabinet. When there is no “nextcabinet,” terminals 3 and 4 are short–circuited.These connections are completed at the factory.


b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the doorinterlock (A02B–0076–J204) is specified:Connections are completed at the factory.

c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and thetiming control cable (A02B–0164–J101) is specified:These connections are made at the factory.

B–62073E/046. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO

MACHINE INTERFACE

120

6 CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE


MACHINE INTERFACE

121

The Series 15–B can be combined with the units shown in the table belowas I/O units for the machine interface.The I/O units for the FANUC I/O Link are installed separately from thecontrol unit, and connected with the control unit using the dedicated serialFANUC I/O Link. As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installedseparately. By placing the connection unit for the operator’s panel nearthe operator’s panel, an operator’s panel that inputs/outputs many signalscan be interfaced easily.The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A is a modular–type I/O unit. It selectsnecessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUCaccording to the application and uses them as one external unit. TheFANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such anexternal unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from themachine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The statesof the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external unitsat regular intervals. (Note that this manual covers only part of the usesthat the FANUC I/O Link has. For example, although it can be used forconnecting the 1–axis CNC FANUC Power Mate or cell controllerFANUC F–D Mate, this manual does not mention it. This is because thepurpose of this manual is to describe the I/O units having machineinterface.)

Table 6.1 Machine interface I/O

Type Name DI/DO points

FANUC I/O Linkcompatible I/O

FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL A Max. 256/256 per groupcompatible I/O

FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL B (Note)Max 1024/1024 in total

Operator’s Panel Connection UnitMax. 1024/1024 in total

Connection Unit

NOTERefer to FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL B Connecting Manual(B–62123E).

6.1OUTLINE


MACHINE INTERFACE

122

Series 15–BControl Unit

FANUCI/O Link

FANUC Link Compatible I/O

FANUCI/O Link

I/O Unit– MODEL A

I/O Unit– MODEL A

Operator’spanel con-nectionunit

MachineOpera-tor’sPanel

Machine Tool

Fig. 6.1 FANUC I/O Link compatible I/O


MACHINE INTERFACE

123

In the I/O Link there are the master station and its slave stations. Themaster is the control unit of the CNC, and the slaves are the I/O unit andinterface unit for the operator’s panel. The slaves are divided into groups,and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum oftwo base I/O unit–MODEL A can be connected as a group. The operator’spanel connection unit and connection unit are each counted as one group.The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types ofunits actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, theassignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been madeprogrammable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/Opoints is 1024.The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and arecommon to all units. A cable is always connected from JD1A of a unitto JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B of the last unit is not used andleft open, it need not be connected with a terminator.(A terminator is needed for the last interface module of each group of theI/O Unit–MODEL A.)The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to allunits on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figureswhen connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.

6.2CONNECTION OFTHE FANUC I/O LINK


MACHINE INTERFACE

124

Connectionunit 2

Connectionunit 1

JD1AÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Magneticcircuit

FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL A ×2 max



Up to 16groups

JD1B Operator’s panel

JD1A connection unit

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Machineoperator’s panel

FANUC I/O Link

I/O = 256/256 or less per group

I/O = 1024/1024 or less in total

JD1B

JD1A

JD1B

JD1A

JD1B

JD1A

Base unit 2Base unit 1

CNC


JD1B

JD1A

Fig. 6.2 I/O Link connection diagram


MACHINE INTERFACE

125

Control unit or preceding slave unit

Next slaveunit

+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessarywhen connecting with a metal cable.

CABLE WIRING

SOUT

*SOUT

SIN

*SIN

0V

0V

0V

0V

SIN

*SIN

SOUT

*SOUT

0V

0V

0V

0V

1

2

3

4

11

12

13

14

3

4

1

2

11

12

13

14

SHIELD

GROUND PLATE

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG×10–pair)

6.2.1Connection of FANUCI/O Link by ElectricCable


MACHINE INTERFACE

126

The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m(when a relay is not used) with optical fiber cables using an optical I/Olink adapter.

NOTEIn the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.

When the cable is more than 15 meters long.

When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is impossible toconnect the cabinets with a grounding wire of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.

When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; forexample :When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cablesuch as a welding machine.When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a longdistance in parallel with the cable.

(1)External dimension of optical link adapterThe standard type (A13B–0154–B001) and high–speed type(A13B–0154–B002) are the same.

Connector for unitconnecting Optical connector

COP1FANUC

JD1

66.0

40.04–M3

45.0

7.0

18.0

(2)Weight of optical link adapterMain body: Approx. 100 gThe standard type (A13B–0154–B001) and high–speed type(A13B–0154–B002) are the same.

6.2.2Connection of FANUCI/O Link by OpticalFiber Cable


MACHINE INTERFACE

127

(3)Connection

(a) Connection diagram

COP1

JD1

↑Connectingcable betweenunits

↑Opticalcable

↑Connectingcable betweenunits

JD1A

JD1

COP1

Unit

JD1B

Unit

↑Optical I/Olink adapter

↑Optical I/Olink adapter

(b) Interunit connecting cables

(1) Recommended connector for cable side: PCR–E20FS (made by HONDA Communication Co., Ltd.)

(2) Recommended cable (wire material): A66L–0001–0284#10P

(3) Cable length: Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)

Unit sideJD1A, JD1B

Adapter sideJD1

(c) Optical cable

(i) Specification: A66L – 6001 – 0009#L5R003 length 5 mA66L – 6001 – 0009#L10R03 length 10 mA66L – 6001 – 0009#L15R03 length 15 m

(ii)Cable length: Max. 200 m (standard type)Max. 100 m (high–speed type)


MACHINE INTERFACE

128

NOTEThe minimum bending radius of the optical fiber cable is 25mm. Take care not to excessively twist the optical fibercable.

(4)Maximum number of stagesWhen a conventional optical I/O link adapter (standard type) is usedon the I/O link, up to five stages can be connected. Up to 16 stages canbe connected when the high–speed type is used.

1) Standard type (A13B–0154–B001)Maximum number of stage: 5

2) High–speed type (A13B–0154–B002) Maximum number ofstages: 16

NC orI/O Unit

Optical I/Olink adapter

NC orI/O Unit

NC orI/O Unit

1 stage




NOTEHigh–speed type adapters cannot be mixed with standardtype adapters on the same line.

(5)Power sourceThe standard type (A13B–0154–B001) and high–speed type(A13B–0154–B002) are the same.

(a) Power voltage: 4.75 V to 5.25 V (at the receiving end)

(b)Consumption current: 200 mA

(6) Installation conditions

(a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it withthe CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.

(b)Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical linkadapter.

(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary tomount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contactwith other circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. Whenmounting the optical link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with anL–type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical linkadapter.

L fifting


MACHINE INTERFACE

129

(7)Required parts

(a) For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, thefollowing parts are necessary:

(i) Optical I/O link adapter 2

(ii)Interunit connecting cable 2

(iii)Optical cable 1

(8)Relay using the optical fiber connection adapter

(a) External dimensions of optical fiber connection adapter

(b)Example of how to use the optical fiber connection adapter

Optical fiber cable

Optical fiber connectionadapter Optical fiber cable

Mounting plate

NOTEOnly one relay connection can be made.The optical fiber connection adapter cannot be used whenhigh–speed type optical link adapters are used.


MACHINE INTERFACE

130

(c) Maximum transfer distance over the optical fiber cableThe following table shows the maximum transfer distance over theoptical fiber cable. This distances varies according to the numberof relay connections made using the connection adapter.

Number of Relays Maximum Transfer Distance

Standard type 0 200 m

1 100 m (total)

High–speed type 0 100 m

1 Not allowed


MACHINE INTERFACE

131

The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A (“I/O unit”) is a modular–type I/O unit.It interfaces the Series 16/18 with the machine when connected to thecontrol unit of the Series 15–B control unit via the I/O Link. One I/O unitcan be configured by mounting the I/O modules required for either the 5–or 10–slot base unit. A variety of I/O modules are provided so appropriatemodules can be selected according to the use, points, voltage level,current capacity, and signal specifications. See Section 6.3.9 for furtherinformation.

Base Unit ABU05A (5 slots) or ABU10A (10 slots)

I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)

Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B

AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O LinkAIF01B expands I/O units in the same group.

6.3CONNECTION OFTHE FANUC I/OUNIT–MODEL A

6.3.1Structure of FANUC I/OUnit–MODEL A


MACHINE INTERFACE

132

f 5 (mounting hole)

A B

For 5–slot base unit (ABU05A) 253 238

For 10–slot base unit (ABU10A) 430 415

Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted toand dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.

(1)Mounting

(a) Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upperside of the base unit.

(b)Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.

(c) Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopperin the lower side of the module stops.

6.3.2Outer Dimensions

6.3.3Mounting andDismounting Modules


MACHINE INTERFACE

133

(2)Dismounting

(a) Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of themodule.

(b)Push the module upwards.


MACHINE INTERFACE

134

Series 15–B

Control unit

JD1A

K1X

JD1B

JD1A

JD2

CP32

I/O Unit–A

AIF01A

DC24 VK2X

K1X

JD3

JD2

CP32

I/O Unit–A

AIF01B

DC24 V

Terminator TX

JD1B

JD1A

JD2

CP32

AIF01A

DC24 V

K2X

K1X

JD3

JD2

CP32

AIF01B

DC24 V

JD1B

JD1A

JD2

CP32

AIF01A

DC24 VK2X

JD3

JD2

CP32

AIF01B

DC24 V

Max. 16

groups

6.3.4Connection Diagram


MACHINE INTERFACE

135

NOTE1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted

depending on the allocation of the I/O points.See 6.2 “Connection of FANUC I/O Link” and 6.3.11“Number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–MODEL A”.

2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the opticalI/O link adapter.

3 Terminate connector JD2 of the last interface module(AIF01B) of the group by using a terminator. See 6.3.7, (3).

Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of theinterface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).

Voltage : DC24 V " 10%

Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.

AIF01A / AIF01B

CP32

1

2

3

+24 V

GND DC24 V

FCI Japan tripolar connector (Brown)

Housing: SMS3PNS–5

Contact: RC16M–SCT3

NOTETurn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when thepower for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power isturned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFFas well.

Power for the masterdevice

Power for the I/O unit

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

t : more than –500 ms (Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500 ms or less.)

t

6.3.5Connecting InputPower Source


MACHINE INTERFACE

136

(1)Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal

M4 screw terminal for grounding

SG terminal(M3 screw terminal)

M4 mounting hole for grounding

ABU05A, ABU10A ABU05B, ABU10B

6.3.6Grounding


MACHINE INTERFACE

137

(2)When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in section 6.3.4) runsbetween different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with agrounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.

Table 6.3.6 Required current of each module

Mod le nameRequired current (mA) of +24 V

Module nameA B

AIF01A 50

AIF01B 50

AID32A 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n

AID32B 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n

AID16C 5

AID16D 5

AID32E 5

AID32F 5

AIA16G 5+1.5×n

AOD08C 5+2×n

AOD08D 5+2×n

AOD16C 5+2×n

AOD16D 5+2×n

AOD32C 5+0.5×n

AOD32D 5+0.5×n

AOA05E 5+5.5×n

AOA08E 5+5.5×n

AOA12F 5+4.5×n

AOR08G 5 10×n

AOR16G 5 10×n

AAD04A 5 130

n: Number of the input and output points (for each module) whichturn ON simultaneously

The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A shouldnot exceed 500 mA.

The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B shouldnot exceed 1500 mA.


MACHINE INTERFACE

138

Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the generalconnection diagram are as follows.

(1)Cable K1X

CNC or AIF01A

Connector HONDA TSUSINPCR–E20FS

AIF01A

(a) Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUTand *SOUT.

(b)Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)

(c) Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate ofthe cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.

(d)Maximum cable length: 10 m

(e) Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.

(f) Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in thefollowing cases]:

6.3.7Connecting SignalCables


MACHINE INTERFACE

139

(i) When the cable is more than 10 meters long.

(ii)When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is noappropriate ground wire between the cabinets.

(iii)When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strongnoise.

(2)Cable K2X

AIF01A

Connector HONDA TSUSINPCR–E20FS

AIF01B

(a) Connect the signals with the same name.

(b)Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6


MACHINE INTERFACE

140

(c) Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are usedinternally.

(d)Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)

(e) Maximum cable length: 2 m

(3)Terminator TX

Connector HONDA TSUSIN

PCR–E20FS

(a) Terminate the connector JD2 of the last AIF01B in asingle group with the terminator.

(b) Short–circuit the TRM1 signals as shown. Repeat theshorting procedure for signals TRM2 and TRM3.


MACHINE INTERFACE

141

For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.

Terminal block type Connector type

ConnectorHONDA TSUSINMR–50RMA

Input/Outputdisplay LED

Terminalblock cover

M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminals)

(1)The terminal block is a removable type.

(a) Dismounting the terminal block

(i) Open the cover of the terminal block.

(ii)Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.

(iii)Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.The terminal block will be removed from the module.

6.3.8Connecting with I/OModules


MACHINE INTERFACE

142

(b)Mounting the terminal block

(i) Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal blockin the groove of the module side.

(ii)Push the terminal block using the engaging point of theprotruding portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in themodule firmly.

(iii)Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure thelatch at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.

(2)Cautionary points when wiring terminal block type

(a) Wiring material: AWG22 to 18 (0.3 to 0.75mm2)A wire as thin as possible is recommended.

(b)Crimp style terminal: M3.5Crimp style terminal with no insulationsleeve and a short distance “A”, asillustrated in the drawing below, isrecommended.

A

(c) Mark tube: As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped partwith the mark tube.


MACHINE INTERFACE

143

(1)Digital input modules

Input type Modulename

Ratedvoltage

Ratedcurrent Polarity Response

time PointsExternalconnec-

tion

LEDdisplay

Non–insulation

AID32A 24 VDC 7.5 mA BothMaximum

20 ms32 Connector

notprovided

insulation DC input AID32B 24 VDC 7.5 mA Both

Maximum2 ms

32 Connectornot

provided

AID16C 24 VDC 7.5 mA NEGMaximum

20 ms16

Terminalblock

provided

Insulationtype DC

AID16D 24 VDC 7.5 mA POSMaximum

20 ms16

Terminalblock

provided

type DCinput AID32E 24 VDC 7.5 mA Both

Maximum20 ms

32 Connectornot

provided

AID32F 24 VDC 7.5 mA BothMaximum

2 ms32 Connector

notprovided

AC input AIA16G100 to

120 VAC10.5 mA

(120 VAC)ON Max 35 msOFF Max 45 ms

16Terminal

blockprovided

NOTE1 Polarity

Negative: 0 V common (current source type)The input is defined as ON when at a low level

Positive: 24 V common (current sink type)The input is defined as ON when at a high level

2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL AConnection/Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).

6.3.9Digital Input/OutputModule


MACHINE INTERFACE

144

(2)Digital output modules

Outputtype

Modulename

Ratedvoltage

Ratedcurrent Polarity Points Points/

commonExternal

connectionLED

display Fuse

AOD08C 2A NEG 8 8Terminal

blockprovided provided

AOD08D 2A POS 8 8Terminal


Insulationtype DC

AOD16C12 to 24

0.5A NEG 16 8Terminal

blockprovided

notprovided

type DCoutput AOD16D

12 to 24VDC

0.5A POS 16 8Terminal

blockprovided

notprovided

AOD32C 0.3A NEG 32 8 Connectornot

providednot

provided

AOD32D 0.3A POS 32 8 Connectornot

providednot

provided

AOA05E100 to 240

2A — 5 1Terminal


ACoutput

AOA08E

100 to 240VAC

1A — 8 4Terminal


AOA12F100 to 120

VAC0.5A — 12 6

Terminalblock

provided provided

RelayAOR08G Maximum

250 VAC/

4A — 8 1Terminal

blockprovided

notprovided

Relayoutput

AOR16G

250 VAC/30 VDC 2A — 16 4

Terminalblock provided

notprovided

NOTE1 Polarity

Negative: 0 V common (current sink type)Output is at low level when ON.

Positive: 24 V common (current source type)Output is at high level when ON.

2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL AConnection/Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).


MACHINE INTERFACE

145

Address inthe module

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit

0

1

2

3

Module of 8 points

Module of16 points

Module of32 points

Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning addressas 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are setby the programmer.For input modules, an input signal becomes “1” when the contact pointconnected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an outputcontact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is “1”.

Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–MODEL A using thefollowing.

(1)Output pointsSum of the actual output Occupied output pointspoints in a group

0 to 32 ‡ 32 points


72 to 128 ‡ 128 points

136 to 256 ‡ 256 points

NOTECount AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.

(2) Input pointsSum of the actual input Occupied input pointspoints in a group



72 to 128 ‡ 128 points

136 to 256 ‡ 256 points

6.3.10Correspondencebetween I/O Signalsand Addresses in aModule

6.3.11Number of I/O Pointsfor I/O Unit–MODEL A


MACHINE INTERFACE

146

However, as a result of the calculation above, when the number ofinput points is not larger than that of the output points in a singlegroup, the number of input points is assumed to be equal to that ofthe output points.

Example 1: When the following modules are used in the groupNo. 0AOD32C 3 AID32A 5AOA12F 2 AIA16G 3

[Output points]32×3+16×2 = 128 ‡ 128 points

[Input points]32×5+16×3 = 208 ‡ 256 points

Example 2: When the following modules are used in the groupNo. 2.AOD16C 7 AID16C 4AOA05E 9 AIA16G 3

[Output points]16×7+8×9 = 184 ‡ 256 points

[Input points]16×4+16×3 = 112 ‡ 128 points

In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of theoutput points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equalto that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.


MACHINE INTERFACE

147

A connection unit (A20B–1005–0310 or A20B–1003–0200) isconnected to the control unit of the Series 15–B via FANUC I/O Link andused for interfacing with the machine.Electrical interfaces and pin assignment for connectors C01 to C05 andC09 to C13 used for interfacing with the machine are fully compatiblewith the connection unit of the Series 15–A. The numbers of input andoutput points for each configuration are listed below.

Name Ordering code Input Output

Connection unit 1 A02B–1005–0310 96 64

Connection unit 1+

Connection unit 2

A20B–1005–0310+

A20B–1003–0200192 128

Ground the connection unit 1/2.

M4 screw

6.4CONNECTING THECONNECTION UNIT


MACHINE INTERFACE

148

Connection unit 1A20B–1005–0310

To the next device

If there is no equipment beyond thisconnection unit, JD1A can remain open.

Series 15–Bcontrol unit

3–pin connector (brown) manufactured byFCI JapanHousing: SMS3PNS–5Contact: RC16M–SCT3

Connection unit 2A20B–1003–0200

To the machine

orI/O unit

Power input specificationsVoltage: 24 VDC " 10%Capacity: 670 + 7.3 × n (mA): When only connection unit 1 is

used1150 + 7.3 × n (mA): When connection unit 1 and

connection unit 2 are usedn: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned

onUse a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the powercable.


MACHINE INTERFACE

149

(a) Between CP52 and CP55

+5 V +5 V 0 V 0 V

1 2 3 4

+24 V +24 N

5 6

Connectors SMS6PN–5

+5 V +5 V 0 V 0 V

1 2 3 4

+24 V +24 N

5 6

CP52 CP55

Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.

6.4.1ConnectingConnection Unit 1 andConnection Unit 2

CDD1FAP–50–1

CDD2FAP–50–1

Cable

Connection Unit 1 Connection Unit 2


MACHINE INTERFACE

150

(b)Between CDD1 and CDD2

A01 0V B01 0V A01 0V B01 0V

A02 B02 A02 B02

A03 B03 A03 B03

A04 0V B04 A04 0V B04

A05 B05 A05 B05

A06 B06 0V A06 B06 0V

A07 *D7 B07 *D6 A07 *D7 B07 *D6

A08 *D5 B08 *D5 A08 *D5 B08 *D5

A09 0V B09 *D3 A09 0V B09 *D3

A10 *D2 B10 *D1 A10 *D2 B10 *D1

A11 *D0 B11 0V A11 *D0 B11 0V

A12 0V B12 0V A12 0V B12 0V

A13 AU B13 A4 A13 AU B13 A4

A14 A3 B14 0V A14 A3 B14 0V

A15 A2 B15 A1 A15 A2 B15 A1

A16 A0 B16 0V A16 A0 B16 0V

A17 *OE B17 0V A17 *OE B17 0V

A18 0V B18 0V A18 0V B18 0V

A19 *DVWE B19 0V A19 *DVWE B19 0V

A20 0V B20 A20 0V B20

A21 0V B21 0V A21 0V B21 0V

A22 *ALRO B22 0V A22 *ALRO B22 0V

A23 *CLR B23 EN A23 *CLR B23 EN

A24 B24 0V A24 B24 0V

A25 *ASIO B25 A25 *ASIO B25

The following cable is available.

Name Ordering code Length

Cable A02B–0072–K818 150mm

Maximum wire length: 1 mConnectors at the ends of the cable:

FAS–50–17 (A63L–0001–0209#50)


MACHINE INTERFACE

151

Input signals for the connection unit conform to a non–insulation typeinterface. There are two input types: Direct current input signal A anddirect current input signal B.

(1)Direct current input signal ADirect current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from themachine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximityswitch.

(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the followingrequirements:Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or moreLeakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mAor less (Voltage: 26.4 V)Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V orless (Current: 8.5 mA)(Including the voltage drop through the cable)

(b)Fig. 6.4.2 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.

CNCMachine

Receiver circuit

Direct current inputsignal

+24 V

Filter and levelconvention circuit

Receiver output signal

R Logical 0 when thecontact is open

Logical 1 when thecontact is closed

Fig. 6.4.2 (a) Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.4.2 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.

5 to 22 ms

Direct currentinput signal closed


Logical 1 (18 V or more)

Chattering of 5 ms or less is ignored

(Signal) (Signal)

5 to 22 ms

Logical 0(6 V or less)

Open

Fig. 6.4.2 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal

6.4.2Input SignalRegulations for theConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

152

(2)Direct current input signal BDirect current input signal B is a signal sent from the machine to theCNC and used at high speed.(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the following

requirements:Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or moreLeakage current between contacts when the circuit is open:

1 mA or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed:

2 V or less (Current: 8.5 mA)(Including the voltage drop through the cable)

(b)Fig. 6.4.2 (c) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.

CNC

+24 V

Filter and levelconversion circuit

Receiveroutput

R

Machine

Output transistor

Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.4.2 (c) Receiver circuit

As shown in Fig. 6.4.2 (c), the common voltage for the connectionunit can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on themachine.

(a) To use the connection unit with the +24 V common voltageConnectÜA with ÜB andÜC with ÜD . Logical 0 when thetransistor is off. Logical 1 when the transistor is on.

(b)To use with the 0 V common voltageConnectÜA with ÜD andÜB with ÜC . Logical 1 when thetransistor is off. Logical 0 when the transistor is on.Fig. 6.4.2. (d) shows the time specifications for the signal.

2 ms max

ON

OFF

Receiveroutput signal

Logical 1 (18 V or higher)

Logical 0 (6 V or higher)

2 ms max

(For +24 V common)

Logical 0 (6 V or lower)

Logical 1 (18 V or lower)

(For 0 V common)

Direct currentinput signal

Fig. 6.4.2 (d) Width and delay time of the input signal


MACHINE INTERFACE

153

The output signals from the connection unit are used for driving relays andlight emitting diodes for indication on the machine. A semiconductorcontact is used as a driver. The output type is direct current output signalA.

(1)Direct current output signal A

(a) Driver ratings

(i) Maximum load current when the output is on: 250 mA or lessincluding an instantaneous value

(ii)Maximum voltage drop when the output is on: 6IL (volts),where IL is the load current(Example) When IL = 250 mA, 6 × 0.25 = 1.5 (V)

(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 50 V or less includingan instantaneous value

(iv)Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less

Relay

Machine

Regulated powersupply on the machine

CNC

Semicon-ductor contact

(b)When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to the machine,mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20 cm or less).When a capacitive load is connected to the machine, insert a serialresistor to limit the current so that the rated current and voltage areensured even for an instantaneous value.

(c) When the lamp is turned on directly by the solid–state relay output,a surge current may flow and damage the driver. Add a protectivecircuit shown below so that the rated current and voltage areensured even for an instantaneous value.

+Lamp

Regulated powersupply

CNC

Semicon-ductor Protective resistor

6.4.3Output SignalRegulations for theConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

154

(1)Connection unit 1

C01 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DIB5 DIB1 DIB6 DI44 DI40 DI45 DI16 DI60

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

0V DIB7 DIB4 DI26 DI37 DI06 DI33 DI50 DI62 51

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+24 DIB2 DIB0 DIB3 COMI1 DI32 DI36 DI31 DI35 DI30 DI34 DI63 DI61 DI56

C02 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DI52 DI65 DI64 DI91 DI92 DI95 DI41 DI77 DI47 DI46 DI73 DI74 DI53 DI67 DI05 DI15 DI25

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

DI93 DI94 DI90 DI22 DI12 DI02 DI97 DI55 DI43 DI42 DI82 DI81 DI80

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+24 DI07 DI17 DI27 DI23 DI13 DI03 DI96 DI57 DI70 DI71 DI72 DI00 DI01 DI10 DI11 DI20 DI21

C03 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DIA0 DIA1 DIA2 DI80 DI81 DI82 DI85 DI86 DI66 DI87 DIA7 DIA6 DO26 COM12 DO27 COM13

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

DIA3 DIA4 DIA5 DI83 DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60 DO22 COM17

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+24V DI04 DI14 DI24 DI84 DI54 DI75 DI76 DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70 DO23 COM18

C04 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DO04 0V 0V 0V DO03 COM1 COM16 DO57 DO55 DO54 DO56 DO12 MOM6 COM10 DO24 COM3

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

COM4 DO01 DO30 DO31 DO32 DO33 COM14 DO13 DO21 COM9 COM5 COM2 COM11 DO07

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

DO05 DO10 DO00 DO02 DO34 DO35 DO36 DO37 DO20 COM7 DO17 DO11 DO06 DO25 COM8 DO14 DO15 DO16

C05 MR–20RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

COM15 COM15

8 9 10 11 12 13

DO40 DO41 DO42 DO43 DO44 DO45

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

DO46 DO47 DO50 DO51 DO52 DO53

6.4.4Connector PinAssignment for theConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

155

(2)Connection unit 2

C09 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DI75 DI71 DI76 DI104 DI100 DI105 DID6 DI102

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

0V DI177 DI174 DIE6 DIF7 DIC6 DIF3 DI110 DI122 DI111

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+24 DI172 DI170 DI173 COM12 DIF2 DIF6 DIF1 DIF5 DIF0 DIF4 DI123 DI121 DI116

C10 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DI112 DI125 DI124 DI151 DI152 DI155 DI101 DI137 DI107 DI106 DI133 DI134 DI113 DI127 DIC5 DID5 DIE5

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

DI153 DI154 DI150 DIE2 DID2 DIC2 DI157 DI115 DI103 DI102 DI142 DI141 DI140

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+24 DIC7 DID7 DIE7 DIE3 DID3 DIC3 DI156 DI117 DI130 DI131 DI132 DIC0 DIC1 DID0 DID1 DIE0 DIE1

C11 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DI160 DI161 DI162 DI140 DI141 DI142 DI145 DI146 DI126 DI147 DI167 DI166 DOA6 COM30 DOA7 COM31

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

DI163 DI164 DI165 DI143 DOE7 DOE6 DOE5 DOE4 DOE3 DOE2 DOE1 DOE0 DOA2 COM35

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

+24 DIC4 DID4 DIE4 DI144 DI114 DI135 DI136 DOF7 DOF6 DOF5 DOF4 DOF3 DOF2 DOF1 DOF1 DOA3 COM36

C12 MR–50RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DO84 0V 0V 0V DO83 COM19 COM34 DOD7 DOD5 DOD4 DOD6 DO92 COM24 COM28 DOA4 COM21

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

COM22 DO81 DOB0 DOB1 DOB2 DOB3 COM32 DO93 DOA1 COM27 COM27 COM20 COM29 DO87

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

DO85 DO90 DO80 DO82 DOB4 DOB5 DOB6 DOB7 DOA0 COM25 DO97 DO91 DO86 DOA5 COM26 DO94 DO95 DO96

C13 MR–20RMA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

COM33 COM33

19 20 21 22 23 24

DOC0 DOC1 DOC2 DOC3 DOC4 DOC5

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

DOC6 DOC7 DOD0 DOD1 DOD2 DOD3


MACHINE INTERFACE

156

Connection unit 1

Connector pin number

Address numberBit number

Direct currentinput signal A

NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number n.

6.4.5Details of theConnection betweenthe Connection Unitand the Machine


MACHINE INTERFACE

157

Connection unit 1






MACHINE INTERFACE

158

Connection unit 1




NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number n.DI82 to DI80 are assigned to two connector pins each.


MACHINE INTERFACE

159

Connection unit 1


Address number

Bit number

Direct currentinput signal B

NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number n.The common voltage for DIB7 to DIB0 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring onthe machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.The common voltage is common to DIB7 to DIB0. It is therefore not possible to use a signalwith the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.


MACHINE INTERFACE

160

Connection unit 1



Direct current input signal A

NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DO05 to DO00 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM1).The common voltages for DO16 to DO14 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM8).


MACHINE INTERFACE

161

Connection unit 1


Address number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.


MACHINE INTERFACE

162

Connection unit 1




NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DO21, DO20, and DO37 to DO30 are connected in connection unit1 (COM14).The common voltages for DO57 to DO54 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM16).


MACHINE INTERFACE

163

Connection unit 1

Connector pin numberAddress number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DO22 and DO67 to DO60 are connected in connection unit 1(COM17).The common voltages for DO23 and DO77 to DO70 are connected in connection unit 1(COM18).


MACHINE INTERFACE

164

C05 (15)

Connection unit 1

Connector pinnumberAddress number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DO47 to DO40 and DO53 to DO50 are connected in connection unit1 (COM15).


MACHINE INTERFACE

165

Connection unit 2


Bit number




MACHINE INTERFACE

166

Connection unit 2


Bit number




MACHINE INTERFACE

167

Connection unit 2


Address number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number n.DI142 to DI140 are assigned to two connector pins each.


MACHINE INTERFACE

168

Connection unit 2


Address number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number n.The common voltage for DI177 to DI170 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring onthe machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.The common voltage is common to DI177 to DI170. It is therefore not possible to use a signalwith the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.


MACHINE INTERFACE

169

Connection unit 2

Connector pinnumber

Address number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DO85 to DO80 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM19).The common voltages for DO96 to DO94 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM26).


MACHINE INTERFACE

170

Connection unit 2

Connector pinnumber

Address number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.


MACHINE INTERFACE

171

Connection unit 2

Connector pinnumber

Address number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DOA1, DOA0, and DOB7 to DOB0 are connected in connection unit2 (COM32).The common voltages for DOD7 to DOD4 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM34).


MACHINE INTERFACE

172

Connection unit 2

Connector pinnumber

Address number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DOA2 and DOE7 to DOE0 are connected in connection unit 2(COM35).The common voltages for DOA3 and DOF7 to DOF0 are connected in connection unit 2(COM36).


MACHINE INTERFACE

173

Connection unit 2

Connector pinnumberAddress number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number m.The common voltages for DOC7 to DOC0 and DOD3 to DOD0 are connected in connectionunit 2 (COM33).


MACHINE INTERFACE

174

6.4.6External View of theConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

175

The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2200–0660, 0661) isconnected to the Series 15–B control unit through the FANUC I/O Linkand is used for interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 arefully compatible with those for Series 15–A. There are two units availabledepending on the number of I/O points.

Specification Input Output

A16B–2200–0660 96 64

A16B–2200–0661 64 32

DC24 V

Series 15–B control unit

JD1A

or I/O unit

JD1B To next device

Operator‘s panel connection unit

A16B–2200–0660,0661

BURNDY 3P CONNECTOR(Brown)



If there is no equipment beyond this connection u nit, JD1A can remain open.

JD1A

CM1

CM2

CM3

CM4

CP61

Machineoperator’spanel

1 +24 V

2 GND

3

Power supply input specificationVoltage: 24 VDC" 10% Capacity:500 + 7.3 × n mAn: number of inputs ON simultaneously

Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.Grounding of the operator’s panel connection unit

Ground mounting plate.

6.5CONNECTION OFOPERATOR’S PANELCONNECTION UNIT


MACHINE INTERFACE

176

Input signals for the operator’s panel connection unit conform to anon–insulation type interface. The input type is direct current input signalA.

(1)Direct current input signal ADirect current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from themachine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximityswitch.

(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the followingrequirements:Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or moreLeakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mAor less (Voltage: 26.4 V)Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V orless (Current: 8.5 mA)(Including the voltage drop through the cable)

(b)Fig. 6.5.1 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.

CNCMachine

Receiver circuit

Directcurrentinput signal

+24 V


Receiveroutputsignal

R Logical 1 whenthe contact isopen

Logical 0 whenthe contact isclosed

Fig. 6.5.1 (a) Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.5.1 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.

5 to 22 ms

Direct current input signal closeed

Open


Logical 0 (18 V or more)

Logical 1 (6 V or less)

Chattering of 5 msor less is ignoared

(Signal) (Signal)

5 to 22 ms

Fig. 6.5.1 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal

6.5.1Input SignalRegulations for theOperator’s PanelConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

177

The output signals from the operator’s panel connection unit are used fordriving lamps and light emitting diodes on the machine operator’s panel.An NPN transistor is used as a driver. The output type is direct currentoutput signal B.

(1)Direct current output signal BThe direct current output signal B is used for driving relays and lightemitting diodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used asa driver.

(a) Ratings of the output transistor

(i) Maximum load current when output is ON: 200 mA (includingmomentary load)

(ii)Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.6 V (maximum)/1.0 V(normal) (when load current is 200 mA)The maximum load current is limited to 1.3 A per common wire(Note).

NOTEAlthough a maximum load current of 200 mA is permittedwhen the output is ON, the load current allowed to flowthrough a common wire is limited to 1.3 A. Therefore, theload current of the output transistor must satisfy thefollowing condition:

(N × I)/Mt 1.3 A

Where N = Number of DO points that can be turned onsimultaneously

I = Load current that flows when output is ONM =Number of common wires (one or two)

Example:When there are 64 DO points that can be turned onsimultaneously and two common wires are used, the rated loadcurrent is 40 mA, calculated as shown below:(64 × I) / 2t 1.3 A

It 40 mA

(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 24 V + 20% or lessincluding an instantaneous value

(iv)Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less

6.5.2Output SignalRegulations for theOperator’s PanelConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

178

(b)Output circuit

ÂÂÂÂÂÂRelay

Machine

Regulated powersupply on the machine

CNC +

Transistor output circuit

(c) When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to themachine, mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20cm or less). When a capacitive load is connected to the machine,insert a serial resistor for limiting the current so that the ratedcurrent and voltage are ensured even for an instantaneous value.

(d)When the lamp is turned OFF, its resistance becomes extremelylow. So, when the lamp is turned on directly by transistoroutput, surge current may flow and damage the transistor. Forthis reason, add a protective circuit as shown below.

–

+

Regulatedpowersupply

CNC

Protective resistor

Lamp


MACHINE INTERFACE

179

Note) DI80 to DIB7 can be used only for the A16B–2200–0660.

Address

NOTEAddress No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.

6.5.3Connector Layout forOperator’s PanelConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

180

Note) DO40 to DO77 can be used only for the A16B–2200–0660.

Address

NOTEAddress No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.


MACHINE INTERFACE

181

Operator’s panel connection unit

Connector terminal numberAddress number

Bit number


NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number p.

6.5.4Details of theConnection betweenthe Operator’s PanelConnection Unit andthe Machine


MACHINE INTERFACE

182



Bit number




MACHINE INTERFACE

183



Bit number




MACHINE INTERFACE

184



Bit number




MACHINE INTERFACE

185


Connector terminal number



Example of connection

(*)

+24 V regulatedpower supply

NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number q.The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected in the operator’s panel connection unit(COM3).+5 V output for supplying the power to the light emitting diode on the operator’s panel. Theoutput voltage is +5 VDC and the current is 300 mA. The power capacity is not enough to drivethe lamp. A separate regulated power supply is necessary for the lamp. The load capacity ofthe output driver refer to 6.5.2.


MACHINE INTERFACE

186







NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number q.The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected inthe operator’s panel connection unit (COM3).


MACHINE INTERFACE

187



Address number

Bit number




NOTEThe machine tool builder can determine address number q.The common voltages for DO67 to DO70 are connected inthe operator’s panel connection unit (COM4).


MACHINE INTERFACE

188

Approx.

Fig. 6.5.5 External view of operator’s panel connection unit

The following LEDs and fuses are mounted on this printed circuit board.

[LEDs]DB1 (GREEN PILOT): Lights when this PCB is ON.DB2 (RED ALARM) : Lights when an error occurs on this PCB or

CNC.

[Fuses]FU1 (3.2 A): For external 24 V inputFU2 (5.0 A): For +5 V power supply used on this PCBOrdering specification A02B–0163–K111 (FU1/FU2 2–fuse set)

6.5.5External View ofOperator’s PanelConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

189

The source output operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2202–0730,or –0731) is connected to Series 15–B control units by the FANUC I/OLink, and functions as the interface with the machine tool operator’spanel.Output from this connection unit is source–type. Input is sink–type(24 V common). However, some connection units have DI that can beswitched to source–type input (0 V common).Two connection units are available according to the number of I/Os.

Specification Input Output

A16B–2202–0730 96 64

A16B–2202–0731 64 32

DC24 V

Control unit series 15–B

JD1A

or

I/O unit

JD1B To next device

Source output operator’s panel connection unit

A16B–2202–0730, 0731

Japan FCI 3–pole Connector (brown)



If there is are no devices beyond this con-nection unit, JD1A may be left open.

JDIA

CM51

CM52

CMB3

CMB4

CP61

Machineoperator’spanel

1 +24 V

2 GND

3

Power supply input specification

Voltage: 24 VDC" 10%Capacity: 500) 7.3 n (mA)

n: number of inputs ON simultaneously

Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.Grounding of the operator’s panel connection unit

Ground mountingplate

6.6CONNECTION OFSOURCE OUTPUTOPERATOR’S PANELCONNECTION UNIT


MACHINE INTERFACE

190

The input signal to the source output operator’s panel connection unit isinput over a non–insulated interface, and is called “DC input signal A.”

(1)DC input signal ADC input signal A is sent to the NC from the machine tool bypushbuttons, limit switches, relay contacts and proximity switches.Most receivers are sink types. However, some inputs can be switchedto source type. (Use of sink–type receivers is required in safetystandards.)

(a) Satisfy the machine–side contact conditions:Contact capacitance: 30 VDC, 16 mA min.Leak current between contacts in open circuit:

1 mA min. (voltage 26.4 V)Voltage drop between contacts in closed circuit:

2 V max. (including cable voltage drop)

(b) Input receiver circuit

Sink–type connection: safety standard compliant (24 V common)


Receiveroutputsignal

R

+24 V

+24 V

Input signal


Fig. 6.6.1 (a) Sink–type receiver circuit

6.6.1Source OutputOperator’s PanelConnection Unit InputSignal Standard


MACHINE INTERFACE

191

(c) Circuit of common switchable input receiver

Sink–type connection: safety standard compliant (24 V common)


Receiveroutput signal

R

+24 V

+24 V

Input signal


Source–type connection (0 V common)


ReceiveroutputsignalInput signal

0 V

DICMN

R

+24 V

+24 V

0 V

DICMN

Contact

Contact

Fig. 6.6.1 (b) Common switchable receiver circuit

Figure 6.6.1 (c) below shows the signal timing standard.

5 to 22ms

DC input signal open

Closed

Receiver outputsignal

Logic “1” (18 V or more)

Chattering of 5 ms orless is ignored.

(Signal) (Signal)

5 to 22ms

Logic “0” (6 V or less)

Fig. 6.6.1 (c) Width and delay time of input signal

DC input signals are logic “1” when High, and logic “0” when Low.


MACHINE INTERFACE

192

Sink–type input signals are logic “0” when the contact is open, and logic“1” when closed.Source–type input signals are logic “1” when the contact is open, andlogic “0” when closed.

NOTEIf the output signal line falls to ground when the input signalis source–type (0 V common), the state is the same whenthe contact is closed. For this reason, source–type inputsignals are not recommended for ensuring safety.By CE–marking compliancy, sink–type (+24 V common)input signals are required.

The output signal of the source output operator’s panel connection unitis for driving lamps and LEDs on the machine tool operator’s panel. AMOS FET is used as the driver.

(1)Direct current output signalThe DC output signal is used for driving relays and light emittingdiodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used as the driver.

(a) Output signal standard is as follows:

Maximum load current when output is ON:200 mA (including momentary load)

Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.0 V max.

Withstand voltage: 24 V + 20% (including momentary load)Leaking current when the output is OFF: 100 mA

Use the following power supply as the external power supply of theoutput signal:

Power voltage: +24 V" 10%

Power current: Sum of maximum load current includingmomentary current per board + 100 mAmin.

Power ON timing: Same time as or before control unit

Power OFF timing: Same time as or after control unit

NOTEConnect the power supply that meets these specificationsto power terminals DOCOM and 0 V for the output signals.The maximum current that is allowed to pass to eachDOCOM terminal pin is 2.0 A, and care must be paid toprevent the sum of the load current from exceeding thecurrent that is allowed to pass via the DOCOM terminal.

6.6.2Output Signal Standardfor Source OutputOperator’s PanelConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

193

(b)Output signal driverEight signals are output from each of the output signal driverelements used on this operator’s panel connection unit.The current of each output signal is monitored in the driverelement. When overcurrent is detected, output of that signal isturned OFF. Once signal output is turned OFF due to overcurrent,signal output is restored to ON as turning signal output OFFeliminates the overcurrent state. For this reason, output isrepeatedly switched ON and OFF when the output signal falls toground or when it is in an overcurrent state. This also happens whena large surge current load is connected.The driver element also has an overheat detection circuit. When theovercurrent state is continuous due to outputs having fallen toground and the temperature inside the element rises, output of alleight signals is turned OFF and this OFF state is held. Output isrestored for each individual signal by temporarily setting outputlogically OFF after the temperature inside the element has dropped.Signal output can also be restored by powering OFF the system.When the overheat detection circuit is activated on this printedcircuit board, the red LEDs mounted next to the driver elementlight so that you can confirm activation of the overheat detectioncircuit. (See Note.) When the overheat detection circuit isactivated, the CNC is notified of an alarm as a system alarm. (Youcan also disable notification to the CNC system of this alarm byclosing (shorting) the short bar of setting pin CP1 mounted on thisprinted circuit board. When notification is disabled, this alarm isnot treated as a system alarm.)

Correspondence between red LED and DO output signal

Red LED Name DO Output Signal Remarks

DAL1 Y q+0.0 to Y q+0.7

DAL2 Y q+1.0 to Y q+1.7

DAL3 Y q+2.0 to Y q+2.7

DAL4 Y q+3.0 to Y q+3.7

DAL5 Y q+4.0 to Y q+4.7

DAL6 Y q+5.0 to Y q+5.7

DAL7 Y q+6.0 to Y q+6.7

DAL8 Y q+7.0 to Y q+7.7

NOTELighting of the red LEDs and transfer alarm to CNC functionare supported on printed circuit board 03B onwards.


MACHINE INTERFACE

194

If the CNC diagnoses that output does not turn ON even though it is ON,a probable cause is that overloading of that output or other output in thesame element is causing the eight outputs of that element to stay OFF. Ifthis is the case, power the system OFF, and remove the cause of theoverload.

Driver device internal block diagram

CONTROLLOGIC

OCD

IN#0

OUT#0

OHD

CONTROLLOGIC

OCD

IN#1

OUT#1

CONTROLLOGIC

OCD

IN#7

OUT#7

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

DOCOM

OHD: Overheat detection circuit OCD: Overcurrent detection circuitThe power supply for operation of this driver device is DOCOM (24 VDC).

(c) Output signal precautionsThe figure below shows the precautions when connecting outputsignals. Parallel connection of output terminals shown like thatshown in this figure is prohibited.

DV

DV

0 V+24 V

Relay

0 V

DOCOM


MACHINE INTERFACE

195

NOTEIf the output signal falls to ground when the output signal issink–type (0 V common), the output signal stays ON. Forthis reason, sink–type output signals are not recommendedfor ensuring safety.By CE–marking compliancy, source–type (+24 V common)output signals are required.

A16B–2202–0730A16B–2202–0731

CP1ALARM

DAL7

DAL8 DAL2

DAL1

DAL3

DAL4

DAL5

DAL6

ALARM out: Normal stateALARM lit: Alarm state (communications with CNC suspended)

The source output operator’s manual connection unit is provided with afunction for detecting and outputting an alarm for excessive currentflowing to the output driver device caused by DO falling to ground.When the above alarm is detected, the CNC outputs a system alarm, andthe LED corresponding to the DO where the alarm occurred lights. Seethe following table for details on which LED lights.You can also disable output of the output driver alarm as a CNC systemalarm by the on–board setting pin “CP1”.If falling to ground of the DO causes excessive current to flow to theoutput driver device.

6.6.3ALARM LEDs onSource OutputOperator’s PanelConnection Unit


MACHINE INTERFACE

196

DAL1 out: Normal statelit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+0.0 to Yq+0.7








System alarms generated by the above alarms are as follows.For details, refer to “Appendix C. 3 (3) –(18) SLC ERROR of the FANUCSeries 15/150–MODEL B Maintenance Manual (B–62075).”

“SLC–ERROR aa(bb)” Example “SLC ERROR 03(41)”(aa: XXXXXX11

Binary bits 0 and 1 are “1”. Other bits are not fixed.)(bb: X1XXXXX1

Binary bit 6 is “1”. Bits other than bit 0 to 4, and 6 are not fixed.)

The value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value indicated by bits 0to 4 is the I/O group number where the error occurred.The above example shows I/O alarms that have occurred in group O.Setting pin “CP1” settings are as follows:

Open: CNC is not notified of alarm.Short: CNC is notified of alarm.


MACHINE INTERFACE

197

(a) Connector pin assignment

DI001

2 DI03

3 DI06

4 DI11

5 DI14

6 DI17

7 DI22

19 DI01

20 DI04

21 DI07

22 DI12

23 DI15

33 DICMN1

34 DI02

35 DI05

36 DI10

37 DI13

38 DI16

39 DI21

8 DI25

9 DI27

10 DI32

11 DI35

12 DI40

13 DI43

24 DI20

25 DI23

26 DI30

27 DI33

28 DI36

29 DI41

40 DI24

41 DI26

42 DI31

43 DI34

44 DI37

45 DI42

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

14 DI46

15 DI51

16 DI54

17 DI56

18 +24 V

30 DI44

31 DI47

32 DI52

46 DI45

47 DI50

48 DI53

49 DI55

50 DI57

CM51

CMB3

CM52

CMB4

DO60

DO63

DO66

DO71

DO74

DO77

DOCOM

DO61

DO64

DO67

DO72

DO75

DO56

0 V

DO62

DO65

DO70

DO73

DO76

DO57

DO001

2 DO03

3 DO06

4 DO11

5 DO14

6 DO17

7 DO22

19 DO01

20 DO04

21 DO07

22 DO12

23 DO15

33 0 V

34 DO02

35 DO05

36 DO10

37 DO13

38 DO16

39 DO21

8 DO25

9 DO27

10 DO32

11 DO35

12 DO40

13 DO43

24 DO20

25 DO23

26 DO30

27 DO33

28 DO36

29 DO41

40 DO24

41 DO26

42 DO31

43 DO34

44 DO37

45 DO42

14 DO46

15 DO51

16 DO54

17 DOCOM

18 DICMN2

30 DO44

31 DO47

32 DO52

46 DO45

47 DO50

48 DO53

49 DO55

50 DOCOM

DI601

2 DI63

3 DI66

4 DI71

5 DI74

6 DI77

7 DI82

19 DI61

20 DI64

21 DI67

22 DI72

23 DI75

33 0 V

34 DI62

35 DI65

36 DI70

37 DI73

38 DI76

39 DI81

8 DI85

9 DI87

10 DI92

11 DI95

12 DIA0

13 DIA3

24 DI80

25 DI83

26 DI90

27 DI93

28 DI96

29 DIA1

40 DI84

41 DI86

42 DI91

43 DI94

44 DI97

45 DIA2

14 DIA6

15 DIB1

16 DIB4

17 DIB6

18 +24 V

30 DIA4

31 DIA7

32 DIB2

46 DIA5

47 DIB0

48 DIB3

49 DIB5

50 DIB7

NOTEConnector CNB4 is not mounted on this PCB when operator’s panel connection unit (DI/DO64/32) is selected.

6.6.4Connector PinAssignment Addressesof Source OutputOperator’s PanelConnection Unit

B–62073E/047. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

208

7 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B–62073E/04 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

209

(1)Standard

ON

COM

OFF

CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI

See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4

ON/OFF BUTTON

See 5.2

CP2, CP3 or CP5See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4

CRT, PDP, LCD UNIT

CN2 PDP POWER

CP11 CRT POWER

CP5 LCD POWER

KEYBOARD PCB

CN1, JA1 VIDEO SIGNAL

SOFT KEY CABLE

JA1

JA2

MAIN CPU BOARD

CK1

OPTION–1 BOARD

(When the graphic display function is used) JA1

CK2

ON1

ON2

OFF1

OFF2

Short–circuit

ON BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

Ground for protection.

See 7.1.9 and 7.1.10

7.1CRT/MDI UNITINTERFACE

7.1.1Outline


210

(2)Standard (When LCD/MDI unit with built–in graphic function isused)

ON

COM

OFF

See 7.1.6

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4

ON/OFF BUTTON

See 5.2

CP5See 7.1.6

LCD WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION

CP5 LCD POWER

KEYBOARD PCB

JN1

JA2

SOFT KEY CABLE

JA1

MAIN CPU BOARD

CNK1

CNK2

ON1

ON2

OFF1

OFF2

Short–circuit

ON BUTTON

OFF BUTTON


See 7.1.9

LCD/MDI


211

(3)MMC–II

ON

OFF

COM

See 7.1.2

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4 ON/OFF BUTTONSee 5.2

CP2, CP3 or CP5See 7.1.2

CRT UNIT

CN2 CRT POWER

KEYBOARD PCB

CN1 VIDEO INPUTJA1

MMC–II GRAPHIC BOARD

M4 TERMINAL(14″ horizontal CRT/MDI)

TAB#10(14″ vertical CRT/MDI)

See 7.1.9CNK1JA2

MAIN CPU BOARD

CRT/MDI


NOTEThe MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


212

(4)MMC–III

CP11 CRT POWER

CP5 LCD POWER

ON

COM

OFF

See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4

ON/OFF BUTTON

See 5.2

CP2, CP3 or CP5See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3

CRT, PDP, LCD BUTTON

KEYBOARD PCB

JA1 VIDEO INPUT

SOFT KEY CABLE

JA1A

MMC–III CPU board

CK1

CK2

ON1

ON2

OFF1

OFF2

Short–circuit

ON BUTTON

OFF BUTTON


See 7.1.11

CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI

JA1

OPTION–1 BOARD

JA2

MAIN CPU BOARD

See 7.1.9

JA1B

NOTEThe MMC–III board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


213

(5)MMC–IV

MAIN CPU BOARD

CP11 CRT POWER

CP5 LCD POWER

ON

COM

OFF

See 7.1.5

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4

ON/OFF BUTTON

See 5.2

CP2, CP3 or CP5See 7.1.5

CRT UNIT

KEYBOARD PCU

JA1 VIDEO INPUT

SOFT KEY CABLE

JA1A

MMC–IV CPU BOARD

CK1

CK2

ON1

ON2

OFF1

OFF2

Short–circuit

ON BUTTON

OFF BUTTON


See 7.1.9

CRT/MDI, LCD/MDI

JA2

OPTION 1 BOARD

JA1

See 7.1.9

JA1B

NOTEThe MMC–IV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


214

VDR1

CNC

JA1,JA1A(PCR–EV20MDT)

11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

200A1

200B2

G3

CP2or

CP3

200A1

200B2

G3

CN2(SMS3RK–3TK2)

VDR1

HSYNC2

VSYNC3

VDG4

VDB567

0V8

0V9

0V10

0V11

0V1213

14151617181920

9″ CRT/MDI or 9″ PDP/MDI

CN1(MR–20RM)


Japan FCISMS3PN–5 (housing)RC16M–23T3 (contact)

or RC16M–SCT3 (contact)

HIROSEFI40A–20S (Connector)FI–20–CV5 (Case)

HONDAMR–20FH (Connector)MR–20LFH (Case)

(Note 1)

GND

(Note 2)

(In case of 9″ color or 9″monochrome PDP)

7.1.29″ CRT or 9 ″ PDPDisplay Interface (CE MarkingNon–compliant)


215

NOTE1 SIGNAL CABLE WIRING

1VDR

20V

3VDG

40V

5VDB

60V

18HSYNC

160V

12VSYNC

140V

VDR1

0V8

VDG4

11

5

12

2

9

3

10

0V

VDB

0V

HSYNC

0V

VSYNC

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable: Max. 50 m

NOTE2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power

cable.3 There is a set place for the adjustment in the back of the

PDP/MDI unit. Refer to 7.1.7 for the adjustment method.


216

VDR1

CNC

JA1 (main CPU, option 1 board)(PCR–EV20MDT)

110V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 130V4 0V14

VDB5 150V6 0V16

7 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

+24V10V2

3

CP5 12

0V3

CN2(SMS6RN–4)

CP5 +24V10V2

CN2(B2P–VH)

+24V10V2

3

VDR1HSYNC2VSYNC3

VDG4VDB5

67

0V80V90V100V110V12

13

14151617181920

9″ CRT PDP/MDI unit

CN1(MR–20RM)


(In case of 9″ monochrome PDP)

Japan Crimped TerminalVHR–2N (housing)SVH–21T1–1 (contact)

(Note 2)

HIROSEFI40A–20A (connector)FI–20–CV5 (case)

HONDAMR–20FH (connector)MR–20LFH (case)

(Note 1)

GND

Japan FCISMS6PN–5 (housing)RC16M–23T3 (contact)

or RC16M–SCT3 (contact)

(Note 2)

(In case of 9″ monochrome CRT)0V4

+24V5+24V6

AMP Japan 1–178128–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)

7.1.39″ CRT or PDP DisplayInterface (CE MarkingCompliant)


217

NOTE1 Signal cable wiring

1VDR

20V

3VDG

40V

5VDB

60V

18HSYNC

160V

12VSYNC

140V

VDR1

0V8

VDG4

11

5

12

2

9

3

10

0V

VDB

0V

HSYNC

0V

VSYNC

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 50 m)

NOTE2 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power

cable.


218

1

VDR1

CNC

JA1 (option 1 board)(PCR–EV20MDT)

11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

200A1

200B2

G3

CP2 or CP3(AMP)

200A1

200B2

G3

CP11(AMP)

CP5(AMP)

CP5(AMP)

+24V1

0V23

14″ CRT/MDI unit10.4″ LCD/MDI unit9.5″ LCD/MDI unit

JA1(PCR–E20LMD)


AMP Japan1–178128–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)

HIROSEFI40A–20S (connector)FI–20–CV5 (case)

(Note 1)

GND

(Note 2)

In case of 14″ CRT


VDR1 11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

+24V0V2

3

(Note 3)

In case of LCD

7.1.414″ Analog CRT, 10.4 ″LCD, 9.5″ LCD DisplayInterface (CE MarkingCompliant whenMMC–IV is not Used)


219


1VDR

20V

3VDG

40V

5VDB

60V

18HSYNC

160V

12VSYNC

140V

VDR1

0V2

VDG3

4

5

6

18

16

12

14

0V

VDB

0V

HSYNC

0V

VSYNC

0V

Ground plate


NOTE2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power

cable.3 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power

cable.


220

1

VDR1

CNC

JA1A (MMC–IV board)(PCR–EV20MDT)

11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

200A1

200B2

G3

CP2 or CP3(AMP)

200A1

200B2

G3

CP11(AMP)

CP5(AMP)

CP5(AMP)

+24V1

0V23

14″ CRT/MDI unit10.4″ LCD/MDI unit9.5″ LCD/MDI unit

JA1(PCR–E20LMD)




(Note 1)

GND

(Note 2)

In case of 14″ CRT


VDR1 11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

+24V0V2

3

(Note 3)

In case of LCD

7.1.514″ Analog CRT, 10.4 ″LCD, 9.5″ LCD DisplayInterface (CE MarkingCompliant whenMMC–IV is Used)


221


Ground plate

1VDR

20V

3VDG

40V

5VDB

60V

18HSYNC

160V

12VSYNC

140V

VDR1

0V2

VDG3

4

5

6

18

16

12

14

0V

VDB

0V

HSYNC

0V

VSYNC

0V


NOTE2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the po

wer cable.3 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power

cable.4 The MMC–IV board cannot be used on the

15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


222

1

RXD1

CNC

JA1 (main CPU board)(PCR–EV20MDT)

11

0V2 TXD123 13

0V4 0V14

*RXD5 15

0V6 0V167 178 *TXD189 1910 20

CP5(AMP)

CP5(AMP)

+24V1

0V23

10.4″ LCD/MDI unit

JN1(PCR–E20LMD)



(Note 1)

GND


TXD1 11

0V2 RXD123 13

0V4 0V14

*TXD5 15

0V6 0V167 178 *RXD189 1910 20

+24V0V2

3

(Note 2)

7.1.610.4″ LCD DisplayInterface (CE MarkingCompliant with Built–inGraphic Function)


223


Ground plate

1RXD

20V

40V

5*RXD

60V

18*TXD

160V

12TXD

140V

TXD1

0V2

4

5

6

18

16

12

14

0V

*TXD

0V

*RXD

0V

RXD

0V


NOTE2 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power

cable.


224

(1)Overview

A color liquid crystal display (LCD) and plasma display (PDP) requiresettings for finely adjusting the video signal.These settings are necessary because the signal slightly varies dependingon the NC unit or cables.How to do the settings is described below.Do the adjustment if the hardware of the display circuit on the NC, thedisplay unit, or a cable is replaced during installation or when a problemoccurs.

(2)Points to be adjusted

SW1TM1 Power

supplySW1 TM1

Color liquid crystal display (rear side)

Plasma display (rear side)

(3)How to do the adjustments

(a) Adjusting any flickering

1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting pin TM1

2 Plasma display: Setting switch TM1

1) Change the setting to find a range in which there is no flickering.

2) If there are several settings without flickering, select the middleone.

(Example) When there is no flickering in settings 2 to 6, selectsetting 4.

(b)Setting the horizontal position

1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting switch SW1

2 Plasma display: Setting switch SW1

1) The horizontal position can be adjusted in units of dots.

2) Set the switch so that the entire screen is displayed. There is onlyone such position. Normally, it is not necessary to change thefactory setting.

(4)OthersDo not change settings other than above such as volumes.

NOTEThe brightness of the LCD display drops in low ambienttemperatures. (The LCD screen is dark immediately afterthe power is turned ON.) This is due to the characteristicsof the LCD, and is not a malfunction. The LCD screenbecomes brighter when the ambient temperature rises.

7.1.7Adjusting the FlatDisplay


225

VDR1

MMC–IV board

JA1A(PCR–EV20MDT)

11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

Option 1 board

JA1(PCR–E20MDT)


VDR1 11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

Signal cable wiring

1VDR

20V

3VDG

40V

5VDB

60V

18HSYNC

160V

12VSYNC

140V

VDR1

0V2

VDG3

4

5

6

18

16

12

14

0V

VDB

0V

HSYNC

0V

VSYNC

0V

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 40 cm)

NOTEThe MMC–IV board cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

7.1.8Interface betweenMMC–IV Board andOption 1 Board (Video Signal)


226

The keyboard interface specification is common to all MDI units exccept9″ keyboard interface.

*KEY001

CNC (LCD)

JA2(PCR–EV20MDT)

*KEY0111

*KEY022 *KEY0312

*KEY043 *KEY0513

*KEY064 *KEY0714

*COM005 *COM0115

*COM026 *COM0316

*COM047 *COM0517

*COM068 *COM0718

*COM089 *COM0919

*COM1010 *COM1120

CRT/MDI UNIT (MDI)

CNK1(PCR–E20MD)

*KEY001 *KEY0111

*KEY022 *KEY0312

*KEY043 *KEY0513

*KEY064 *KEY0714

*COM005 *COM0115

*COM026 *COM0316

*COM047 *COM0517

*COM068 *COM0718

*COM089 *COM0919

*COM1010 *COM1120

(Note 1)

NOTE1 The parenthesized mode’s

apply to the 10.4″ LCD/MDIunit with the internal graphicsfunction.

Cable wiring

*KEY00

*KEY02

*KEY04

*KEY06

*COM00

*COM02

*COM04

*COM06

*COM08

*COM10

*KEY01

*KEY03

*KEY05

*KEY07

*COM01

*COM03

*COM05

*COM07

*COM09

*COM11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

*KEY00

*KEY02

*KEY04

*KEY06

*COM00

*COM02

*COM04

*COM06

*COM08

*COM10

*KEY01

*KEY03

*KEY05

*KEY07

*COM01

*COM03

*COM05

*COM07

*COM09

*COM11

Ground plate

Shield

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)

Cable length: Up to 50 m

7.1.9Keyboard Interface


227

CNC

JA2(PCR–EV20MDT)

*COM111

*COM002

*COM013

*KEY064

*KEY045

*KEY026

*KEY007

*COM028

*COM039

*KEY0710

*KEY0511

*KEY0312

*KEY0113

*COM0414

*COM0515

*COM0616

*COM0717

*COM0818

*COM0919

*COM1020

CRT/MDI UNIT

CA9(MR–20RFD)

*KEY001 *KEY0111

*KEY022 *KEY0312

*KEY043 *KEY0513

*KEY064 *KEY0714

*COM005 *COM0115

*COM026 *COM0316

*COM047 *COM0517

*COM068 *COM0718

*COM089 *COM0919

*COM1010 *COM1120

Cable wiring

*KEY00

*KEY02

*KEY04

*KEY06

*COM00

*COM02

*COM04

*COM06

*COM08

*COM10

*KEY01

*KEY03

*KEY05

*KEY07

*COM01

*COM03

*COM05

*COM07

*COM09

*COM11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

7

6

5

4

2

8

14

16

18

20

13

12

11

10

3

9

15

17

19

1

*KEY00

*KEY02

*KEY04

*KEY06

*COM00

*COM02

*COM04

*COM06

*COM08

*COM10

*KEY01

*KEY03

*KEY05

*KEY07

*COM01

*COM03

*COM05

*COM07

*COM09

*COM11

Shield

Ground plate


Cable length: Up to 50 m

7.1.10Small 9 ″ KeyboardInterface


228

VDR1

CNC MMC–III CPU board

JA1(PCR–EV20MDT)

11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 178 HSYNC189 1910 20

CNC option 1 board

JA1(PCR–EV20MDT)

VDR1 11

0V2 VSYNC12

VDG3 13

0V4 0V14

VDB5 15

0V6 0V167 17

(DTC)8 HSYNC189 1910 20

Signals with marked ( ) is not used.

Cable wiring

VDR

0V

VDG

0V

VDB

0V

HSYNC

0V

VSYNC

0V

1

2

3

4

5

6

18

16

12

14

1

2

3

4

5

6

18

16

12

14

VDR

0V

VDG

0V

VDB

0V

HSYNC

0V

VSYNC

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable

NOTEThe MMC–III board cannot be used on the15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

7.1.11Interface betweenMMC–III Board andOption 1 Board (Video Signal)


229

RELAYING CONNECTOR

Cable wiring

Shield

Ground plate


NOTEFor +24 V and SG, determine the wire thickness and the number of wires so that the conductorresistance is 0.33 W or less.

7.2I/O DEVICEINTERFACE

7.2.1RS–232–C Serial Port


230

RELAYING CONNECTORSIGNAL LAYOUT

Relaying cable Accessory for PPR

Input power supply

Relaying connectorConnector: DBM–25S (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)Lock metal: D20418–J2 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Cable side connectorConnector: DBM–25P (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)Lock metal: DB–C2–J9 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

AC85 to 125 V50/60 Hz " 3 Hz 0.2 KVA

NOTE1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool

builder.2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.3 Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–00414 When connecting the PPR, set the corresponding parameter to use reader puncher interface

(baud rate is 4800 baud).

7.2.2PPR Connection


231


Relaying cableAccessory for

portable tape reader

Input power supply

Relaying connectorConnector: DBM–25S (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)Lock metal: D20418–J2 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Cable side connectorConnector: DBM–25P (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)Lock metal: DB–C2–J9 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

AC200 to 240 V (+10%, –15%)50/60 Hz " 1 Hz 110 VA (Without reel)

130 VA (With reel)

Portable tapereader

Cable side plugWF7013 (Matsushita Denko)

Plug receptableWF3012E (Matsushita Denko)

NOTE1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool

builder.2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.3 Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–00414 When connecting the portable tape reader, set the corresponding parameter to use reader

puncher interface (baud rate is 4800 baud).

7.2.3Portable Tape ReaderConnection


232

Cable side connectorConnector: DBM–25P (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Lock metal: DB–C2–J9 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)


Relaying cable

Relaying connectorConnector: DBM–25S (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Lock metal: D20418–J2 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Accessory for cassette

NOTE1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.

Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–00413 Open all terminals other than illustrated.4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface when connecting FANUC cassette.

The standard baud rate is 4800 baud.5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter (an external disk drive) and FANUC Handy File (an I/O

unit) at the same time. If they are connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A,JD5B, and JD5J, the power capacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacityexceeds that of +24 V, the operation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)

7.2.4FANUC CassetteConnection


233

Cable side connectorConnector: DBM–25P (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Lock metal: DB–C2–J9 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)


Relaying cable

Relaying connectorConnector: DBM–25S (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Lock metal: D20418–J2 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Accessory for cassette

NOTE1 The machine tool builder must provide the relay connector and relay cable.2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.

Ordering code of recommended cable: A66L–0001–00413 Open all terminals other than those illustrated.4 Set the parameter enabling the reader/punch interface to be used when connecting a FANUC

Handy File. The standard baud rate is 4800 bauds.5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter FANUC Handy File at the same time. If they are

connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A, JD5B, and JD5J, the powercapacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacity exceeds that of +24 V, theoperation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)

7.2.5Connection with theFANUC Handy File


234

Connector: DB–25PLocking: D110278(Japan AviationElectronic Inc., Ltd.)

Tape readerDB–25S–T (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.

M3 screw terminal

NIHON AMP1–178128–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)

Use cable lamp

Tape readerControl unit

Connect signal cables as shown below.

NOTE1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be

connected.2 Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–00413 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC

voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the powersupply for the tape reader.

7.2.6Connection of TapeReader Without Reels


235

Burndy JapanSMS3PK–5

Tape reader

NIHON AMP1–178128–3

Use cable lamp

Tape readerControl unit

Connect signal cables as shown below.

NOTE1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be

connected.2 Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–00413 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC

voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the powersupply for the tape reader.

7.2.7Connection of TapeReader with Reels


236

CNC subboard Host computer (example)

+24 V is not used.

(1)Conceptual diagram for signal connectionThe following is a conceptual diagram showing the connection of thesignals between the CNC and host.Actually, each signal other than FG and SG requires two lines becausethe signals are transmitted in differential signal transmission in theRS–422 standard.

CNC HostOutputInput

7.2.8RS–422 Serial Port


237

(2)Example of actual connection of RS–422 cables

Shield

Ground plate

(Note 2)

NOTE1 Use twisted–pair cables.2 Note that the pin position for the *DM signal is irregular on the CNC side (to prevent erroneous

connection).


238

MPG

MPG UNIT #1(M3 screw terminal)



CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pair) FOR Lv 20 m

7.3MANUAL PULSEGENERATORINTERFACE

0.1: 0.1 A power supply current of themanual pulse generator

R: Resistance per unit length of thewire (W/m)

m: Number of wires connected ineach 0 V and 5 V line

L: Wire length (m)


239

(1)Cable connection for the manual pulse generatorThe power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as forthe pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistancefrom causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2 V (total for boththe 0 V and 5 V lines). This is written as:

0.2 +u0.1 R 2L

m

This can be converted to the following equation:

L +tmR

When A66L–0001–0286 cable is used:This cable, developed for the FS15–B/16/18 pulse coder interface,consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When three wires of this cable are used for 0V and another three for 5 V, the allowable cable length is calculatedas follows:

L +t3

0.0394+ 76.75 [m]

This means that a power supply with a cable length of 50 m is stillwithin specifications.


240

CNC OPTION–1 Board Host computer (example)

Conceptional diagram of signal connection

CNC side Host sideOutputInput

7.4REMOTE BUFFERINTERFACE(RS–232–C)


241

Example of cabling

Shield

Ground plate

Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A orexpanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is usedfor busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure toconnect CD to ER.


242

CNC OPTION–1 Board Host computer (example)

(+24 V) is not used.

(1)Conceptional diagram of signal connectionThe figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a hostcomputer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differentialsignal transmission, two wires of signal lines are used for thosesignals.

CNC side Host sideOutputInput

7.5REMOTE BUFFERINTERFACE (RS–422)


243

(2)Actual example of RS–422 signal wiring

Shield

Ground plate

(Note 2)

NOTE1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.2 Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side is positioned irregularly relative

to the other signals. This is to reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when this connector iserroneously connected to the connector on the other side.


244

Connection for high–speed skip signals is as follows:7.6HIGH–SPEED DISIGNAL INTERFACE


245

Cable connection

Shield

Ground plate

Shield

Ground plate

Description

15M15T

High–speed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP4) orhigh–speed measured position–reached signals(HEA1 to HEA3)

HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1HDI1 = HSKP2 or HEA2HDI2 = HSKP3 or HEA3HDI3 = HSKP4

151T

High–speed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP3) orhigh–speed measured position–reached signals(HEA1 to HEA3)

HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1 on tool post 1HDI1 = HSKP2 or HEA2 on tool post 1HDI2 = HSKP3 or HEA3 on tool post 1

HDI4 = HSKP1 or HEA1 on tool post 2HDI5 = HSKP2 or HEA2 on tool post 2HDI6 = HSKP3 or HEA3 on tool post 2

NOTEUnused pins of the connectors must be left open.


246

High–speed DI Signal Receiver Input Signal StandardCircuit configuration

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂ

Â

ÂÂÂÂShield

Iih/IilÂÂ

VH/VL

NC ReceiverDriver

Absolute maximum ratingInput voltage range Vin: –3.6 V to +13.6 VInput characteristics

Item Symbol Standard Unit Description

High–level input voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V

Low–level input voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V

High level input current Iih0.5 max. mA Vin=5 V

High–level input current Iih9.3 max. mA Vin=10 V

Low–level input current Iil –8.0 max. mA Vin=0 V

NOTE1 Symbols lih and lil shows the signal flow direction, + signals

flow into the receiver, and – signals flow out of the receiver.2 When the input voltage is low level, high–speed skip signals

are regarded as logic “1”, and when the input voltage is highlevel, the signals are regarded as logic “0”.


247

Connect the reference position approach signal as shown below. Thissignal is used when using the grid method (only for CNCs for multiaxismachines).For information regarding connections and sequences for referenceposition return, refer to the BMI Interface Connection Manual. Thefollowing text describes only the connection of the reference positionapproach signal.

CNC (Additional cabinet)

Cable wiring

Shield

Ground plate

Signal name Description

NZ1 1st–axis reference position approach signal

Axis CPU1NZ2 2nd–axis reference position approach signal

Axis CPU1NZ3 3rd–axis reference position approach signal

NZ4 4th–axis reference position approach signal


Axis CPU2NZ2 6th–axis reference position approach signal

Axis CPU2NZ3 7th–axis reference position approach signal


7.7CONNECTION OFREFERENCEPOSITIONAPPROACH SIGNAL


248

a. Multi–point connection

CNC OPTION–1 board

JD6A(PCR–EV20MDT)

Tap

1 TRD2(+)

2 TRD2(–)

3

4

5

6

7 SG

8

9

10 TRD1(+)

11 TRD1(–)

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

1 TRD1(+)

2 TRD1(–)

3

4

5

6

7

8 SG

9

10

11 TRD2(+)

12 TRD2(–)

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Cable connection

TRD1 (+)

TRD1 (–)

TRD2 (+)

TRD2 (–)

SG

1

2

11

12

8

10

11

1

2

7

TRD1 (+)

TRD1 (–)

TRD2 (+)

TRD2 (–)

SG

PCR connector MR connector(MR20 female)

7.8DNC INTERFACE

7.8.1DNC1 Interface


249

b. 1–1 connection


JD6A(PCR–EV20MDT)

Tap

1 SD

2 *SD

3 TR

4 *TR

5 RS

6 *RS

7 SG

8 TT

9 *TT

10 RD

11 *RD

12 DM

13 *DM

14 CS

15 *CS

16

17

18 RT

19 *RT

20

1 RD

2 *RD

3 RT

4 *RT

5 CS

6 *CS

7 DM

8 SG

9 *DM

10

11 SD

12 *SD

13 TT

14 *TT

15 RS

16 *RS

17 TR

18 *TR

19

20

Cable connection

SD

*SD

RD

*RD

TT

*TT

RT

*RT

RS

*RS

CS

*CS

DM

*DM

TR

*TR

SG

11

12

1

2

13

14

3

4

15

16

5

6

7

9

17

18

8

1

2

10

11

8

9

18

19

5

6

14

15

12

13

3

4

7

SD

*SD

RD

*RD

TT

*TT

RT

*RT

RS

*RS

CS

*CS

DM

*DM

TR

*TR

SG

Twisted shielded cable0.3 mm2 wire or thicker

HONDA Tsushin MR20 (female)


250


JD5C(PCR–EV20MDT)

Host computer (example)

DBM–25S

1 FG

2 SD

3 RD

4 RS

5 CS

6 DR

7 SG

8 CD

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 ER

1 RD

2 0V

3 DR

4 0V

5 CS

6 0V

7 CO

8 0V

9

10 (+24V)

11 SD

12 0V

13 ER

14 0V

15 RS

16 0V

17

18

19 (+24V)

20

Conceptual diagram ofsignal connection

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG0V

FRAME

CNCOutputInput

Host

21

22

23

24

25

When CS is not used, short with RS.When DR is not used, short with ER.CD must be shorted with ER at all times.

NOTEWhen an IBM PC–AT is used, RS becomes low in thereception phase. When this happens, short CS on the hostwith ER on the host.

7.8.2DNC2 Interface(RS–232–C)


251


JD6A(PCR–EV20MDT)

Host computer (example)

1 FG

2

3

4 SD

5

6 RD

7 RS

8 RT

9 CS

10

11

12

13

20

21

22 *SD

23

24 *RD

25 *RS

26 *RT

1 RD

2 *RD

3 RT

4 *RT

5 CS

6 *CS

7 DM

8 0V

9 *DM

10 (+24V)

11 SD

12 *SD

13 TT

14 *TT

15 RS

16 *RS

17 TR

18 *TR

19 (+24V)

20

27 *CS

28

29 *DM

30 *TR

31

DM

TR

14

15

16

17

18

19

32

33

34

35 *TT

36

37

TT

SG

Conceptual diagram ofsignal connection

SD

RD

RS

CS

TR

DM

TT

RT

SG

FG

SD

RD

RS

CS

TR

DM

TT

RT

SG

FG0V

FRAME

CNCOutputInput

Host

(+24 V) is not used.

7.8.3DNC2 Interface (RS422)


252

The following two configurations of the spindle interface are available inSeries 15–B.

(1)α Series Serial spindle

P/C

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Serial

JA7B spindle

JA7A amplifierMotor

1st spindle

SPDL–1 (JA7A)

Main CPUboard P/C

Serial

JA7B spindle

JA7A amplifierMotor

2nd spindle

(2)Analog spindle

Analog spindleamplifier

SPDL–1 (JA7A)

A–OUT1 (JA8A)

SPDL–2 (JA7B)

A–OUT2 (JA8B)

Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)

Analog signal

Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)

Analog signal

P/C

Motor

1st spindle

P/C

Motor

2nd spindle

Analog spindleamplifier

The position coder return signal for the 1st spindle is connected toconnector JA7A used for connecting the serial spindle described in (1)above.

NOTEOnly the 1st analog spindle can be connected for the Series15–MB and 15–TB. The 1st and 2nd analog spindles canbe connected only for Series 15–TTB.

7.9SPINDLE INTERFACE


253

Spindle Motor Safety MeasureTo ensure a high degree of safety in the event of a malfunction, adopt asafety measure such as that shown below capable of stopping spindlerotation if a speed higher than the specified spindle speed is detected.

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ


Spindle speeddetection

Ã

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Greaterthan

specifiedvalue?

PMC

CNC

Actual spindle speedsignal

AR0 to AR15

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

P/C

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Spindle


SP motor

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Spindle amplifier

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

MCCÃ

200 VAC input

Example of safety circuit when analog spindle I/F interface is used

The speed of rotation input to the CNC from the position coder is read bythe PMC. If this speed of rotation exceeds the preset spindle speed, theMCC for the spindle amplifier is shut OFF by the PMC.


WARNING


254

Connect to the spindle amplifier, using optical fiber cable equipped withan optical I/O link adaptor.

I/O LINK ADAPTER

Up to 2 m Opticalfibercable

CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate

Spindleamplifier


7.9.1Serial Spindle Interface(S Series Spindle)


255

See section 6.2.2 for adapter and optical fiber cable specifications.Pay attention to the following points when you are using the panel internalwiring type without reinforced covering (A66L–6001–0008).

Do not to bend optical fiber cable to less than a radius of 15 mm.

Do not unnecessarily twist optical fiber cable.

When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allow theouter covering of the cable to be deformed. (Do not tug on nylon bands.Tugging on nylon bands applies unnecessary force on the optical fibercable.)

When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allowbending force to be applied partially.

CNC

JA7A (main CPU board)(PCR–EV20MDT)

ÃÃ ÃÃÃ

1 SIN

2 *SIN

3 SOUT

4 *SOUT

5

6

7

8

9 (+5V)

10

11

12 0V

13

14 0V

15

16 0V

17

18 (+5V)

19

20 (+5V)

Ã

CNC

JA7A

SOUT

*SOUT

SIN

*SIN

0V

0V

0V

3

4

1

2

12

14

16

1

2

3

4

12

14

16

α series spindle amplifier module

JA7B

SIN

*SIN

SOUT

*SOUT

0V

0V

0V

ShieldGround plate

α series spindle amplifier module

1 SIN

2 *SIN

3 SOUT

4 *SOUT

5

6

7

8

9 (+5V)

10

11 0V

12 0V

13 0V

14 0V

15 0V

16 0V

17

18 (+5V)

19

20 (+5V)

JA7B(PCR–EV20MDT)

7.9.2Serial Spindle Interface(α Series)

CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate


256

NOTE1 Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–0248#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs)2 When this cable is wired closely to power cables or other cables, shielded leads must be

grounded to the grounding plate. This is unnecessary when the CNC is mounted close to thespindle amplifier module.

3 When the CNC and spindle amplifier module are located in the same magnetics box ormagnetics box welded together, connection by electrical signal leads from this case isnecessary. When the CNC and spindle motor are mounted separately in two or moremagnetics boxes that are not welded together, they must be connected by optical fiber cableusing the optical I/O link adapter.

4 The +5 V terminal is for optical link transfer via the optical I/O link adapter. When connectingby a metal cable such as this cable, leave the +5 V terminal unconnected. When the +5 Vterminal is connected by mistake, short both the +5 V terminals on the NC unit and the spindlemodular.

Signal nameÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ DescriptionÃ

ÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

SVC, ESÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃSpindle command voltage and commonline

ÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃ


ENB1, ENB2ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Spindle enable signal (Note 1)ÃÃ

ÃÃ


CLKX0, CLKX1FSX0, FSX1DX0, DX1" 15 V, ) 5 V, 0 V

ÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Feed axis check signal (Note 2)ÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃ



7.9.3Analog SpindleInterface

Shield

Earth plate

POSITION CODER


257

NOTE1 ENB1 and 2 turn on when a spindle command voltage is effective. These signals are not used

when the FANUC Spindle Servo Unit is used.2 Feed axis check signal is used when a feed axis is checked or service work is done. This signal

is not used for spindle control.

Signal nameÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃDescription

ÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃ


SC, *SCÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃPulse coder C–phase signalÃ

ÃÃÃ


PA, *PAÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃPulse coder A–phase signalÃ

ÃÃÃ


PB, *PBÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃPulse coder B–phase signalÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃ


SOUT, *SOUTÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Signal for serial spindle (Note 1)ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ



RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG×6+#24AWG×3) max length 20 m.

7.9.4Pulse Coder Interface


258

NOTE1 Signals SPOUT and *SPOUT are for a serial spindle. These

signals are not used for an analog spindle.2 When the line length is over 14 m, set the maximum

electrical resistance of 0 V and 5 V to 0.5 W.

The position coder, which generates square waveform voltage signals ofthe number proportionate to the angle of rotation of the spindle, is usedfor per–revolution feed and for thread cutting. The spindle and theposition coder are connected in the following four ways by parametersetting (parameter 5610).

(1)One revolution of the position coder for one revolution of the spindle.

(2)One revolution of the position coder for two revolution of the spindle.

(3)One revolution of the position coder for four revolution of the spindle.

(4)One revolution of the position coder for eight revolution of the spindle.

Fig. 7.9.4 shows the timing chart of signals generated from the positioncoder.

PA1024 pulse/revolution

PB1024 pulse/revolution

SC1 pulse/revolution

Fig. 7.9.4 Waveform generated by position coder

NOTEA differential driver is used for feedback from the positioncoder.*PA, *PB, and *SC are the inverted signals of PA, PB, andSC respectively and vice sersa.


259

The servo interface of the Series 15–B has these features.

Digital control AC servo motorMotor feedback : Serial pulse coder

1) 10,000 pulse/rev incremental pulse coder

2) 1,000,000 pulse/rev absolute pulse coder

Scale feedback : A/B/Z signal interface

SEPARATE TYPEDISCHARGE UNIT

MAIN CPU BOARDOPTION–2 BOARD

JVn

JFn

JA4A, JA4B

n=AXIS NUMBER(1, 2, .. 8)

JF2n

+6 V BATTERY UNITFOR ABSOLUTEPULSE CODER

CN1200 VAC INPUTDIGITAL SERVOAMPLIFIER

MS3106B22–14S

LINEAR SCALE

AC 200 V

For details, refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTORDESCRIPTIONS (B–65002E)

AC 100 V

T2 T4

T1

7.10SERVO INTERFACE

7.10.1Outline


260

(1) For the α series servo amplifier

n: Axis number (1 to 8)

CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate

JV1 to JV8(PCR–EV20MDT)


7.10.2Servo Amp Interface


261

(2)For the S–series servo amplifier


CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate




262

(3)For the C–series servo amplifier


CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate




263

(1) For the serial pulse coder A, B

SERVO MOTOR

CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate

SHLD (shield)

PULSE CODERJF1 to JF8(PCR–EV20MDT)

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pair)

7.10.3Serial Pulse CoderInterface


264

(2)For the serial pulse coder C (model 0S or more)

SERVO MOTOR

CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate

SHLD (shield)

PULSE CODER

MS3106B20–29SW (straight)MS3108B20–29SW (elbow)

JF1 to JF8(PCR–EV20MDT)



265

(3)For the model 4–0S to 0–0SP (common for incremental and absolute)

SERVO MOTOR

CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate

SHLD (shield)

PULSE CODER

Connector HDAB–15SConnector cover HDAW–15–CV (2–0SP to 0–0SP)Connector cover HDA–CTH (4–0S, 3–0S)




m: Number of wires connected in each0 V and 5 V line

L: Wire length (m)


266

(1)Cable connection for the incremental pulse coderSeries 15–B employ a serial pulse coder for which the power supplyis 5 VDC, same as used by the conventional pulse coder. It is necessaryto suppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V orless (total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines). This is written as:

0.5 +uR 2L

m


L +tm4R

(a) When A66L–0001–0286 cable is used:This cable, developed for the Series 15–B/16/18 pulse coder interface,consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cablelength is calculated as follows:

L +t3

4 0.0394+ 19 [m]

This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with theSeries 15–B/16/18 and 18 connector. However it cannot be extendedup to 50 m.

(b)When A66L–0001–0157 cable is used:This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B–61393)for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power linewires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated asfollows:

L +t3

4 0.016+ 46.87 [m]

This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securelyinto f cable clamp for Series 15–B cable.It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminalblock or peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reducethe diameter so that it fits into the connector.

Example 1)

For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications

Pulse corder

Terminalblock


m: Number of wires connected in each0 V and 5 V line

L: Wire length (m)


267

Example 2)

Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube

Pulse corder

Enlarged figure

(2)Cable connection for the absolute pulse coderSeries 15–B employ the serial pulse coder, for which the power supply5 VDC, same as for the conventional pulse coder. It is necessary tosuppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V or less(total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).This is written as:

0.5 +uR 2L

m


L +tm4R

(a) When A66L–0001–0286 cable is used:This cable, developed for the Series 15–B/16/18 pulse coder interface,consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cablelength is calculated as follows:

L +t3

4 0.0394+ 19 [m]

This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with theconnector for Series 16 and 18 but cannot be extended up to 50 m.

(b)When A66L–0001–0157 cable is used:This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B–61393)for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power linewires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated asfollows:

L +t3

4 0.016+ 46.87 [m]

This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely intothe cable clamp for Series 15–B.It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal block orpeel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce the diameterso that it fits into the connector.


268

Example 1)

Example 2)

For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications

Pulse corder

Terminalblock

Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube

Pulse corder

Enlarged figure


269

LINEAR SCALE

CABLE WIRING

Shield

Ground plate

+6 V and REQ are for separate absolute pulse coders.


RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24WG × 3–pair)

7.10.4Linear Scale Interface(A/B/Z Signal Interface)


270

Input Signal StandardThe standard for the feedback signal from the linear scale is as follows.

(1)A, B phase signal inputThe position of the linear scale is detected by inputting positioninformation by the A and B phase signals whose phases are mutuallydisplayed by 90°. The B phase signal ahead of the A phase signal isinterpreted as a movement of the linear scale in the plus direction,while the A phase signal ahead of the B phase signal is interpreted asa movement of the linear scale in the minus direction.

Move to + direction A phase signal

B phase signal

Move to – direction A phase signal

B phase signal

(2)Phase difference and minimum repeat cycle Tdy 0.15 msec (0.21 msecwhen servo software 906X is used)

0.5V

PCA/*PCA

*PCA/PCA

PCB/*PCB

*PCB/PCB

ÃÃ

0.5V

ÃÃÃTd

ÃÃÃ

A

B

ÃÃÃTd

ÃÃÃTd

ÃÃTd

ÃÃÃTp

(3)Z phase signal inputA signal width of 1/4 cycle or more of the A and B phase signals isrequired for Z phase signal input (single rotation signal).

Z phase signal

ÃÃÃTw

Twy 1/4 cycle of A phase or B phase


271

CNC


ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

1 SD

ÃÃÃÃ

ShieldGround plate

11

2 *SD 12 0V

3 13

4 14 0V

5 REQ 15

6 *REQ 16 0V

7 (+6V) 17

8 18 +5V

9 +5V 19

10 20 +5V

Linear scale (serial interface)

+6 V is for separate absolute pulse coders.

CABLE WIRING

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

1

2

5

6

9

18

20

12

14

16

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pairs)

7.10.5Linear Scale Interface(Serial Interface)


272

CABLE WIRING

Battery case

Battery case

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALy 0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)

NOTEThe service life of the APC battery is about one year perfour–cell battery case when used for backup of six axes(serial pulse coder A).

7.10.6APC Battery Interface


273

The hybrid control system requires an auxiliary position detecting devicein addition to the position detector used in conventional servo systems.This auxiliary position detecting device is called the separate detector.For hybrid control, the pulse detector can be used as the separate detector(linear scale such as an optical scale or Magnescale). The separatedetector connectors (JF21 to JF28) of the CNC are the same as those ofthe linear scale interface (see 7.10.4).

Positioncommand

Hybridecontrol

Digitalservoamp.

ACservomotor

Build inpulsecoder

JVn

n: Axis number = 1, 2, 3 ...

Linear scale

JFn

JF2n

CNC

7.10.7Hybrid–controlConnections


274

AIN01

CNC

JA6(PCR–EV20MDT)

AIN1110V2 0V12

AIN23 AIN3130V4 0V14

5 15(0V)6 (0V)16

7 178 189 1910 20

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

Analog voltage input range: –10 V to +10 VInput current: " 0.5 mA max.

NOTESignals enclosed in parentheses cannot be used.Unused pins must be left open.

Connect the signal cables as follows:

1st analog spindle unit

Control unit

Ã

2nd analog spindle unit

Ã

Ã

1st general–purpose analoginput signal

Ã

2nd general–purpose analoginput signal

Clamp the cables with a cable clamp.

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)

7.11GENERAL–PURPOSEANALOG VOLTAGEINPUT INTERFACE


275

Control unitMMC–II MAIN CPU JD5A to JD5B: PCR20

Punch panel (RS–232C)CD6A to CD6B: DBM–25S

CD6AtoCD6B

JD5AtoJD5B JD6(Note 3)

NOTE1 The above diagram shows the connection with the punch panel (connector for an extension

cable). For connection with external devices, prepare cables for direct connection, if necessary.2 The +24 V terminal in the above diagram is used exclusively for the FANUC I/O devices. Do

not use it for other purposes.When a FANUC I/O device that utilizes +24 V is connected to Series 15–B, do not connect morethan one device at one time due to the limitation of the power supply.

3 For the MMC CPU (A02B–0120–J201), which requires two RS–232C channels and oneRS–422 channel, JD6 is used as an RS–422 port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS–232Cinterface.

4 The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

7.12CONNECTIONBETWEEN THESERIES 15–B(MMC–II ) ANDPERIPHERAL UNITS


276

MMC–II MAIN CPU Punch panel

(RS–232–C)

JD5A to JD5B – 11

JD5A to JD5B – 12

JD5A to JD5B – 01

JD5A to JD5B – 02

JD5A to JD5B – 15

JD5A to JD5B – 16

JD5A to JD5B – 05

JD5A to JD5B – 06

JD5A to JD5B – 03

JD5A to JD5B – 04

JD5A to JD5B – 07

JD5A to JD5B – 08

JD5A to JD5B – 13

JD5A to JD5B – 14

SD

0V

RD

0V

RS

0V

CS

0V

DR

0V

CD

0V

ER

0V

SD

RD

RS

CS

DR

CD

ER

SG

ÃÃ

CD6A to CD6B – 02

CD6A to CD6B – 03

CD6A to CD6B – 04

CD6A to CD6B – 05

CD6A to CD6B – 06

CD6A to CD6B – 08

CD6A to CD6B – 20

CD6A to CD6B – 07

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Ã

Ã

ÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

JD5A to JD5B – 10 +24V

JD5A to JD5B – 19 +24V +24V

FG

CD6A to CD6B – 25

CD6A to CD6B – 01

NOTE1 The cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units

in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp. Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P

2 The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.


277

Control unitMMC–II MAIN CPU JD6: PCR20

External device (RS–422)

NOTE1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be

actually used shall be designed according to the interface for external device.2 Do not connect anything to the (+24 V) terminal.3 For the MMC–II CPU (A02B–0120–J202), which requires three RS–232C channels, JD6 is

used as an RS–232C port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS–422 interface.4 The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

7.13CONNECTION WITHAN EXTERNALDEVICE USING THERS–422 INTERFACEFOR SERIES 15–B(MMC–II )


278

MMC–II MAIN CPU I/O (RS–422)

JD6 – 11

JD6 – 12

JD6 – 01

JD6 – 02

JD6 – 15

JD6 – 16

JD6 – 05

JD6 – 06

JD6 – 07

JD6 – 09

JD6 – 17

JD6 – 18

JD6 – 13

JD6 – 14

JD6 – 03

JD6 – 04

SD

*SD

RD

*RD

RS

*RS

CS

*CS

DR

*DR

ER

*ER

TT

*TT

RT

*RT

– 06

– 24

– 04

– 22

– 09

– 27

– 07

– 25

– 12

– 30

– 11

– 29

– 08

– 26

– 17

– 35

Ã

RD

*RD

SD

*SD

CS

*CS

RS

*RS

ER

*ER

DR

*DR

RT

*RT

TT

*TT

JD6 – 08 0V

JD6 – 10

JD6 – 19

(+24V)

(+24V)

SG

FG

– 19

– 01

NOTEThe cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.Connect the units in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cableclamp.

Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P


279

Control unitMMC–II MAIN CPU JD9: PCR20

Printer (Centronics)

NOTE1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be

actually used shall be designed according to the interface for the applicable external device.2 The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

7.14CONNECTION WITHA PRINTER USINGTHE CENTRONICSINTERFACE FORFANUC SERIES 15–B(MMC–II )


280

MMC–II MAIN CPU Printer (Centronics)

JD9 – 01

JD9 – 02

JD9 – 03

JD9 – 04

JD9 – 12

JD9 – 05

JD9 – 06

JD9 – 07

JD9 – 08

JD9 – 14

JD9 – 09

JD9 – 11

JD9 – 10

JD9 – 13

JD9 – 16

JD9 – 15

JD9 – 20

JD9 – 17

JD9 – 19

JD9 – 18

STD0

STD1

STD2

STD3

0V

STD4

STD5

STD6

STD7

0V

PE

*STB

SLCT

*AFD

0V

*INIT

BUSY

*SLIN

*ERROR

0V

– 02

– 20

– 03

– 21

– 04

– 22

– 05

– 23

– 06

– 24

– 07

– 25

– 08

– 26

– 09

– 27

– 12

– 30

– 01

–19

– 13

– 14

– 16

– 31

– 28

– 11

– 29

– 36

– 32

– 33

– 17

STD0

0V

STD1

0V

STD2

0V

STD3

0V

STD4

0V

STD5

0V

STD6

0V

STD7

0V

PE

0V

*STB

0V

SLCT

*AFD

0V

*INIT

0V

BUSY

0V

*SLIN

*ERROR

0V

FGÃÃ

Ã

Ã

ÃÃ

Ã

ÃÃÃÃÃ

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

Ã

NOTEThe cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the unitsin accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp.

Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0285#25P


281

Control unitMAIN CPU (01P3C)JD5C: PCR20

Extension adapter unit

JD5: PCR20

(Note 1)

M4 screw terminal

To keyboard

NOTE1 It is not necessary to prepare the cable, because it is attached to the keyboard.2 The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

7.15CONNECTION WITHAN EXTENSIONADAPTOR UNIT FORFANUC SERIES 15–B(MMC–II )


282

(1)Connection for signal wire

MAIN CPU Extension adapter

JD5C – 11

JD5C – 12

JD5C – 01

JD5C – 02

JD5C – 05

JD5C – 04

JD5C – 13

JD5C – 14

SDK

0V

RDK

0V

CSK

0V

ERK

0V

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

Ã

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

Ã

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

JD5 – 11

JD5 – 12

JD5 – 01

JD5 – 02

JD5 – 05

JD5 – 04

JD5 – 13

JD5 – 14

ÃÃ

D5C – 10

D5C – 19

D5C – 06

D5C – 08

D5C – 16

+24V

+24V

0V

0V

0V

JD5 – 10

JD5 – 19

JD5 – 06

JD5 – 08

JD5 – 16

SDK

0V

RDK

0V

CSK

0V

ERK

0V

+24V

+24V

0V

0V

0V

NOTEThe cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the unitsin accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp.Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P.

(2)Connection with the cable

Extension adapter

NOTEThe cable shall be 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or thicker. Groundthe cable.


283

Control unitMMC–II MAIN CPU (01P3C)JD7: PCR50

Hard disk unit

JD7: PCR50

Power supply unit


7.16CONNECTION WITHA HARD DISK UNITFOR FANUC SERIES15–B (MMC–II )


284

Hard disk unit

JD7B: PCR50

Cassette Streamer unit

JD7A: PCR50


285


*DB0

0V

*DB1

0V

*DB2

0V

*DB3

0V

*DB4

0V

*DB5

0V

*DB6

0V

*DB7

0V

*DBP

0V

*TERMPWR

0V

*ATN

0V

*BSY

0V

*ACK

0V

*RST

0V

*MSG

0V

*SEL

0V

*C/D

0V

*REQ

0V

*I/O

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

JD7 – 26

JD7 – 01

JD7 – 27

JD7 – 02

JD7 – 28

JD7 – 03

JD7 – 29

JD7 – 04

JD7 – 30

JD7 – 05

JD7 – 31

JD7 – 06

JD7 – 32

JD7 – 07

JD7 – 33

JD7 – 08

JD7 – 34

JD7 – 09

JD7 – 38

JD7 – 39

JD7 – 41

JD7 – 16

JD7 – 43

JD7 – 18

JD7 – 44

JD7 – 19

JD7 – 45

JD7 – 20

JD7 – 46

JD7 – 21

JD7 – 47

JD7 – 22

JD7 – 48

JD7 – 23

JD7 – 49

JD7 – 24

JD7 – 50

JD7 – 25

JD7 – 35

JD7 – 10

JD7 – 36

JD7 – 11

JD7 – 37

JD7 – 12

JD7 – 40

JD7 – 15

JD7 – 42

JD7 – 17

JD7 – 14

JD7 – 13

MAIN CPU(Hard disk unit)

Hard Disk Unit(Cassette streamer unit)

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

JD7 – 26

JD7 – 01

JD7 – 27

JD7 – 02

JD7 – 28

JD7 – 03

JD7 – 29

JD7 – 04

JD7 – 30

JD7 – 05

JD7 – 31

JD7 – 06

JD7 – 32

JD7 – 07

JD7 – 33

JD7 – 08

JD7 – 34

JD7 – 09

JD7 – 38

JD7 – 39

JD7 – 41

JD7 – 16

JD7 – 43

JD7 – 18

JD7 – 44

JD7 – 19

JD7 – 45

JD7 – 20

JD7 – 46

JD7 – 21

JD7 – 47

JD7 – 22

JD7 – 48

JD7 – 23

JD7 – 49

JD7 – 24

JD7 – 50

JD7 – 25

JD7 – 35

JD7 – 10

JD7 – 36

JD7 – 11

JD7 – 37

JD7 – 12

JD7 – 40

JD7 – 15

JD7 – 42

JD7 – 17

JD7 – 14

JD7 – 13

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ Ã

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ Ã

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ Ã

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ ÃÃÃ Ã

*DB0

0V

*DB1

0V

*DB2

0V

*DB3

0V

*DB4

0V

*DB5

0V

*DB6

0V

*DB7

0V

*DBP

0V

*TERMPWR

0V

*ATN

0V

*BSY

0V

*ACK

0V

*RST

0V

*MSG

0V

*SEL

0V

*C/D

0V

*REQ

0V

*I/O

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V


286

NOTE1 Use a shielded cable containing 25 pairs of AWG28 wires,

with a characteristic impedance of 100 to 130 ohms.Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0319#25P

2 For noise protection, thread the shielded cable throughferrite cores as shown below and connect the shield to theframe ground at both ends.

Connector

Ferrite coreCable

FG

Connector

Ferrite core

fFGf

NOTE3 Ensure that the total signal cable length (J11M + J66M)

does not exceed 6 m.

(2)Power connection

CP3 – 1

CP3 – 2

CP3 – 3

R

S

G

R

S

G

PW1 – 1

PW1 – 2

PW1 – 3

NOTEUse a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the powercable.


287

Connection with portable 5.25″ and portable 3.5″ floppy disk unit

Control unit

MMC–II MAIN CPU (01P3C)JD8: PCR50

Portable floppy disk unit

JD8: PCR50


7.17CONNECTION WITHA FLOPPY DISK UNITFOR FANUC SERIES15–B (MMC–II )


288


MAIN CPU PortableFDD Unit

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ Ã

Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃ

ÃÃÃ Ã

ÃÃ

Ã ÃÃ

JD8 – 07

JD8 – 08

JD8 – 38

JD8 – 39

JD8 – 09

JD8 – 10

JD8 – 36

JD8 – 37

JD8 – 17

JD8 – 18

JD8 – 40

JD8 – 41

JD8 – 26

JD8 – 27

JD8 – 34

JD8 – 35

JD8 – 28

JD8 – 29

JD8 – 32

JD8 – 33

JD8 – 15

JD8 – 16

JD8 – 30

JD8 – 31

JD8 – 13

JD8 – 14

JD8 – 03

JD8 – 04

JD8 – 05

JD8 – 06

JD8 – 11

JD8 – 12

JD8 – 01

JD8 – 02

JD8 – 19

JD8 – 20

JD8 – 42

JD8 – 43

JD8 – 44

JD8 – 45

JD8 – 46

JD8 – 47

JD8 – 21

JD8 – 22

JD8 – 23

JD8 – 48

*MON

0V

*MODE

0V

*DS0

0V

*DS1

0V

*DS2

0V

*DS3

0V

*SIDE

0V

*HDLD

0V

*TRK0

0V

*INDEX

0V

*DIR

0V

*STEP

0V

*WE

0V

*WPRT

0V

*WDATA

0V

*RDATA

0V

*READY

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

*MON

0V

*MODE

0V

*DS0

0V

*DS1

0V

*DS2

0V

*DS3

0V

*SIDE

0V

*HDLD

0V

*TRK0

0V

*INDEX

0V

*DIR

0V

*STEP

0V

*WE

0V

*WPRT

0V

*WDATA

0V

*RDATA

0V

*READY

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

JD8 – 07

JD8 – 08

JD8 – 38

JD8 – 39

JD8 – 09

JD8 – 10

JD8 – 36

JD8 – 37

JD8 – 17

JD8 – 18

JD8 – 40

JD8 – 41

JD8 – 26

JD8 – 27

JD8 – 34

JD8 – 35

JD8 – 28

JD8 – 29

JD8 – 32

JD8 – 33

JD8 – 15

JD8 – 16

JD8 – 30

JD8 – 31

JD8 – 13

JD8 – 14

JD8 – 03

JD8 – 04

JD8 – 05

JD8 – 06

JD8 – 11

JD8 – 12

JD8 – 01

JD8 – 02

JD8 – 19

JD8 – 20

JD8 – 42

JD8 – 43

JD8 – 44

JD8 – 45

JD8 – 46

JD8 – 47

JD8 – 21

JD8 – 22

JD8 – 23

JD8 – 48


289

NOTE1 The cable for J12M shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.

Connect the units in accordance with the diagram on the previous page, and fasten the shieldwith a cable clamp.

Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0285#25P2 The cable must not be more than 2 m long.

(2)Connection with the cable

AC100V toAC240V

Portable 5.25″FDD Unit

R

S

G

PW1 – 1

PW1 – 2

PW1 – 3

NOTEThe cable shall be 20/0.18 (0.5 mm2) or thicker.


290

MMC–III CPU BoardHost Computer (Example)

JD5F to JD5H(PCR–EV20MDT)

The signal marked with ( ) connect to FANUC I/O device side.

Signal connection

(1)When the terminals (CS, DR, CD) can not be used.

HostMMC–III CPU BoardSD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

ÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃ

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

(SIGNAL GROUND)

(FRAME GROUND)

7.18RS–232–C SERIALPORT (MMC–III )


291

(2)When all signals can be used.

ModemMMC–III CPU BoardSD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

SD

RD

RS

CS

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

(SIGNAL GROUND)

(FRAME GROUND)



292

MinislotOuter Hard Disk Interface Board

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA02B–0161–K800Cable for Data transmission orCable attached with external hard disk.

POKEDY 2.5 A87L–0001–0135

Refer to the wiring diagram on the next page.


7.19OUTER HARD DISKINTERFACE(MMC–III )


293

Cable Wiring

*D0

0V

*D1

0V

*D2

0V

*D3

0V

*D4

0V

*D5

0V

*D6

0V

*D7

0V

*DP

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

*ATN

0V

0V

0V

*BSY

0V

*ACK

0V

*RST

0V

*MSG

0V

*SEL

0V

*CD

0V

*REQ

0V

*IO

0V

26

1

27

2

28

3

29

4

30

5

31

6

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

10

36

11

40

15

41

16

42

17

43

18

44

19

45

20

46

21

47

22

48

23

49

24

50

25

26

1

27

2

28

3

29

4

30

5

31

6

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

10

36

11

40

15

41

16

42

17

43

18

44

19

45

20

46

21

47

22

48

23

49

24

50

25

*D0

0V

*D1

0V

*D2

0V

*D3

0V

*D4

0V

*D5

0V

*D6

0V

*D7

0V

*DP

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

*ATN

0V

0V

0V

*BSY

0V

*ACK

0V

*RST

0V

*MSG

0V

*SEL

0V

*CD

0V

*REQ

0V

*IO

0V

B–62073E/048. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

294

8 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNALÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

We recommend appropriate use of the emergency stop signal whendesigning a safe machine tool.The emergency stop signal is for stopping the machine tool in anemergency, and is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier and spindleamplifier. Generally, B–contact pushbutton switches are used for theemergency stop signal.When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNCcontroller is set to an emergency stop canceled state, and the servoamplifier and spindle motor can be controlled and operated.When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is open, the CNCcontroller is reset to an emergency stop state, and the servo amplifier andspindle motor are decelerated and stopped.In the case of the servo motor, the drive power supply of the servoamplifier is turned OFF to activate a dynamic brake and stop servo motoroperation. Since gravity causes the servo motor used for the gravity shaftto continue operation, you must consider using a servo motor with abrake.In the case of the spindle motor, if the drive power supply of the spindleamplifier is suddenly turned OFF turning spindle operation, inertia causesthe spindle to continue operation, which is more dangerous. The spindlemotor must be controlled in such a way that deceleration and stopping ofspindle motor operation is confirmed before its drive power supply isturned OFF when the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact has becomeopen.The above have been taken into consideration in FANUC’s α series ofcontrol amplifiers. On these control amplifiers, input the emergency stopsignal to the power supply module (PSM). Since the drive power supplyMCC control signal is output from the PSM, use this signal to controlON/OFF switching of the drive power supply that is input to the powersupply module.Detection of overtravel by the software limit function is included in thebasic specifications of this CNC controller, and limit switches for regulardetection of overtravel are not required. However, if a malfunction in theservo feedback system causes the machine tool to move beyond thesoftware limits, provide stroke end limit switches so that the emergencystop signal functions to stop the machine tool.Figure 8 shows a example of how the emergency stop signal is connectedwhen this CNC controller and an α series control amplifier are used.


NOTE

B–62073E/04 8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

295

Stroke end limit switch

Relay powersupply

Release switch

Emergencystop button

Spark killer

RelayI/O unit connected to CNC(module)

α series control amplifier (PSM)

External powersupply

Spark killer

Coil

Breaker 1 MCC AC reactor

Fig. 8

NOTEWhen the amplifier is connected to a spindle motor made byanother manufacturer, a sequence for safely deceleratingand stopping the spindle motor when the emergency stopsignal contact becomes open during spindle motoroperation must be incorporated referring to the instructionmanual for the spindle motor.

APPENDIX

B–62073E/04 A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONSAPPENDIX

331

A LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONSÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Fig. 1 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of 3–slot control unitÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Fig. 1 (b)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of 4–slot control unitÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 1 (c)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of 6–slot control unitÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 1 (d)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of 8–slot control unitÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (a)ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit, (Small type,monochrome CRT) External view of horizontal type 9 PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of horizontal type 9″ small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (c)ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard,monochrome CRT) External view of horizontal type 9″ PDP/MDI unit (standard)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (d)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal dimensions of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit(standard, monochrome CRT)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (e)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 2 (f)ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of horizontal type 9.5″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]External view of horizontal type 10.4″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5kg]

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (g)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of horizontal type 9.5″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]External view of horizontal type 10.4″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0kg]

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (h)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

14″ CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)ÂÂ

ÂÂ


Fig. 2 (i)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ14″ CRT/MDI unit (vertical)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (j)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ9″ separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT) 9″ separate typePDP unitÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (k)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ9″ separate type CRT unit (color)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (l)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂSeparate type MDI unit (standard)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (m)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal dimensions of separate type 10.4″ LCD unitÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (n)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal) (for separate type LCD with built–in graphic function)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 2 (p)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)

(for separate type LCD with built–in graphic function)ÂÂ

ÂÂ


Fig. 2 (q)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal dimensions of separate type 9.5″ LCD unit(monochrome STN)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 3 (a)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of control transformer (A80L–0001–0176)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 3 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Description of control transformerÂÂ

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

APPENDIX B–62073E/04A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

332

Fig. 4 (a)ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of position coder A or B A86L–0026–0001#102: Max. 4000 rpm A86L–0026–0001#002: Max. 6000rpm

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


Fig. 4 (b)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂα External dimensions of position coder A860–0309–T302: Max.10,000 rpm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 5 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of manual pulse generator A860–0202–T001Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 5 (b)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of pendant type manual pulse generatorA860–0202–T004 to T015

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 6ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of FANUC PPRÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 7 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of punch panel (CE marking non–compliant)Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 7 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 7 (c)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)ÂÂ

ÂÂ


Fig. 8ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of floppy cassette adapterÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 9ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of FANUC Handy FileÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 10ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of portable tape readerÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 11ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 12ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of tape reader with reelsÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 13 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of input unit (A14B–0076–B001)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 13 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

External view of input unit (Multiple axis) (A14B–0076–B401)ÂÂ

ÂÂ


Fig. 13 (c)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal dimensions of input unit (multi–axis machine)(A14B–0076–B402)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 13 (d)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of expanded power input unit (A14B–0076–B209)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 14 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of PCR connector (soldering type)Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 14 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of FI40 connectorÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 15 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)ÂÂ

ÂÂ


Fig. 15 (b)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV2 type)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 15 (c)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 15 (d)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV type)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 16 (a)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of AMP connector (1–178128–3)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 16 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of AMP connector (2–178129–6)Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 16 (c)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of AMP connector (2–178288–3)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 16 (d)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

External view of AMP connector (1–178288–3)ÂÂ

ÂÂ


Fig. 16 (e)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of AMP connector (1–175196–2/–5, 175218–2/–5)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 17 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of HONDA connector (case)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 17 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of HONDA connector (female)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 17 (c)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

External view of HONDA connector (male)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ



B–62073E/04 A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONSAPPENDIX

333

Fig. 17 (d)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 18 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 18 (b)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 18 (c)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 18 (d)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 18 (e)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)Â

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 19 (a)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

External view of reader puncher panel connectorÂÂ

ÂÂ


Fig. 19 (b)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lockÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 20ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of power receptacle for portable tape readerÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 21ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of battery case for absolute pulse coderÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 22ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15–B(MMC–II)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 23ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal View of the Keyboard for Series 15–B (MMC–II)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 24ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of the hard disk unit for Series 15–B (MMC–II)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Fig. 25ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of the Portable 5″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B(MMC–II)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 26ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂExternal view of the Portable 3.5″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B(MMC–II)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Fig. 27ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series15–B (MMC–II) (A08B–0047–C071)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ



APPENDIX B–62073E/04B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

334

B EXTERNAL DIMENSIONSÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Weight: 2.3 kg

Fig. 1 (a) External view of 3–slot control unit

B–62073E/04 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONSAPPENDIX

335

Weight: 2.5 kg

Fig. 1 (b) External view of 4–slot control unit


336

Weight: 3.8 kg

Fig. 1 (c) External view of 6–slot control unit


337

Weight: 5.0 kg

Fig. 1 (d) External view of 8–slot control unit


338

Weight: 4.0 kg

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from theouter periphery on the rear of the operator’s panel PCB.

Panel cut drawingÂÂÂÂÂ

85 (PDP)220 (Monochrome CRT)

Fig. 2 (a) External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit, (Small type, monochrome CRT)External view of horizontal type 9 PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)

Unit support(for reference)

Panel cut drawing

ÂÂÂÂÂ

An appropriate support for theCRT unit should be provided.Weight: 8 kg

Fig. 2 (b) External view of horizontal type 9 ″ small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)


339



Weight: 4.0 kgCE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from theouter periphery on the rear of the operator’s panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (c) External view of horizontal type 9 ″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)External view of horizontal type 9 ″ PDP/MDI unit (standard)


340

Panel cut drawing

ÂÂÂÂÂ


Weight: 5 kg

Fig. 2 (d) External dimensions of horizontal type 9 ″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)


341

Unit support(for reference)


An appropriate support for theCRT unit should be provided.

Weight: 8 kg


Fig. 2 (e) External view of horizontal type 9 ″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)


CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer peripheryon the rear of the operator’s panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (f) External view of horizontal type 9.5 ″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]External view of horizontal type 10.4 ″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]


342



Fig. 2 (g) External view of horizontal type 9.5 ″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]External view of horizontal type 10.4 ″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]


343

Fig. 2 (h) 14 ″ CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)


344


VIEW FROM REAR SIDE

Weight: 20 kg


8–f 4.8

Fig. 2 (i) 14 ″ CRT/MDI unit (vertical)


345


Weight: 3.5 kg



Fig. 2 (j) 9 ″ separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT)9″ separate type PDP unit


346


Weight: 8 kg

Fig. 2 (k) 9 ″ separate type CRT unit (color)


347


Weight: 0.5 kg


Fig. 2 (l) Separate type MDI unit (standard)


348



Weight: 2 kg

Fig. 2 (m) External dimensions of separate type 10.4 ″ LCD unit


349



Weight: 1 kg

Fig. 2 (n) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal) (for separate type LCD with built–in graphic function)


350

Panel cut drawing

ÂÂÂÂÂCE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer peripheryon the rear of the operator’s panel PCB.

Weight: 1 kg

Fig. 2 (p) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)(for separate type LCD with built–in graphic function)


351



Weight: 2 kg

Fig. 2 (q) External dimensions of separate type 9.5 ″ LCD unit (monochrome STN)


352

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

CAUTIONTURN MAIN LINE SWITCH OFF BEFORE HANDLING TB1 ORTB2

Max. 155

Max

. 17

5

Weight: 14 kgUnit: mm

Fig. 3 (a) External view of control transformer (A80L–0001–0176)


353

Specification of control transformer

(1)Primary side rated voltageAC200V/220V/230V/380V/415V/440V/460V/480V/550V

(2)Voltage fluctuationPrimary side rated voltage ±15%

(3)Frequency50Hz/60Hz±3Hz

(4)Secondary side line voltageSee the figure below.

(5)Secondary side voltage deviationLess than ±3%

(6)Secondary side voltage regulationLess than 7%

(7)Transformer ambient temperature and humidity–5°C+60°C 10 to 95% (Relative humidity)

100B

200B

100A

200A

TB1

COM

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ100V

Â

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

200V

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂ

Â550

480

460

440

380

240

230

220

200

ÂÂ

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

200 to 550V

TB1

ÂÂ

Â

1A

5A

Fig. 3 (b) Description of control transformer


354

Connector

Radial Thrust

Operation 1 kg or less 1 kg or less

Idle 20 kg or less 10 kg or less

Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:

(1) Input axis inertia1.0 × 10–3 kg·cm·sec2 or less

(2) Input axis starting torque1000 g·cm or less

(3) Input axis permissible loads

Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive thetiming belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the aboveallowable value.

(4) Weight: 1 kg or less

Unit: mm

Fig. 4 (a) External view of position coder A or B A86L–0026–0001#102: Max. 4000 rpmA86L–0026–0001#002: Max. 6000rpm


355

Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:

(1) Input axis inertia1.0 × 10–3 kg·cm·sec2 or less

(2) Input axis starting torque1000 g·cm or less

(3) Input axis permissible loads

Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive thetiming belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the aboveallowable value.

(4) Weight: Approx. 750 g

MS connector: MS3102A–20–29P

Radial Thrust

Operation 10 kg or less 5 kg or less

Idle 20 kg or less 10 kg or less

Unit: mm

Fig. 4 (b) a External dimensions of position coder A860–0309–T302: Max. 10,000 rpm


356

3 holes equally spaced on a 72 dia

M3 screw terminal

Fig. 5(a) External view of manual pulse generatorA860–0202–T001


357

(1)A860–0202–T004 to T009

M3 screw terminal

M3 screw terminal

(2)A860–0202–T010 to T015

M3 screw terminal

M3 screw terminal

Fig. 5 (b) External view of pendant type manual pulse generatorA860–0202–T004 to T015


358

Cable length: 1.5 mWeight: about 12 kgUnit: mm

Fig. 6 External view of FANUC PPR


359

4-M

3

Pan

el c

utou

tÂÂÂÂ

Hon

da T

sush

inC

onne

ctor

:P

CR

-E20

FS

Cov

er:

PC

S-E

20LA

For

crim

p te

rmin

al M

4fo

r fra

me

grou

ndin

g

Leng

th: 2

00 m

mJa

pan

Avi

atio

nE

lect

roni

cD

BM

-25S

Col

or: P

–ME

–N1.

5–3G

f4-

3.

6

Fig. 7 (a) External view of punch panel (CE marking non–compliant)

NOTEA ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.


360

Ext

erna

l dim

ensi

ons

of w

ide

type

Japa

n A

viat

ion

Ele

ctro

nic

DB

M-2

5S

Leng

th: 2

00 m

m

For

crim

p te

rmin

alM

4 fo

r fra

me

grou

ndin

g

Hon

da T

sush

inC

onne

ctor

:P

CR

-E20

FS

Cov

er:

PC

S-E

20LA

f4-

3.

6

Pai

nt m

aski

ng a

rea

on p

unch

pan

el s

ide

Pan

el c

utou

t

Fig. 7 (b) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)

NOTE1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust–

and water–proofing.2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel

must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked witha paint band to make it electrically conductive.

3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on thelocker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.

4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.


361

Japa

n A

viat

ion

Ele

ctro

nic

DB

M-2

5S

Leng

th: 2

00 m

m

For

crim

p te

rmin

alM

4 fo

r fra

me

grou

ndin

g

Hon

da T

sush

inC

onne

ctor

:P

CR

-E20

FS

Cov

er:

PC

S-E

20LA

Ext

erna

l dim

ensi

ons

of th

in ty

peP

aint

mas

king

are

a on

pun

ch p

anel

sid

e

Pan

el c

utou

t

Fig. 7 (c) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)

NOTE1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust–

and water–proofing.2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel

must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked witha paint band to make it electrically conductive.

3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on thelocker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.

4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.


362

Fig. 8 External view of floppy cassette adapter


363

Cable length: 3.0 mmWeight: 1.4 kgUnit: mm

Fig. 9 External view of FANUC Handy File


364

Paint: Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finishWeight: About 15 kg

Fig. 10 External view of portable tape reader


296

AUTO

MANUAL

RELEASE

Wiring screw M3 × 6

Powerterminal strip

Signal cable Cable holder

4– f 5.3

View fromarrow A

Signal cable connector

(Panel installation holelayout diagram)

Coating Color: Metallic silverWeight: 6 kgUnit: mm

Fig. 11 External view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)

NOTEInstall the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.


297

REEL ONAUTO

ALARM

FORWARD STOP REWIND

REEL OFFRELEASE

View from arrow A

M5 × 10

Stud

4– f 5.3

(Panel installation holelayout diagram)

Coating Color: Metallic silverWeight: 9 kgUnit: mm

Parallel interfaceconnector

Power connector

RS–232–Cinterface connector

Fig. 12 External view of tape reader with reels

NOTEInstall the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.


298

Fig. 13 (a) External view of input unit(A14B–0076–B001)


299

Fig. 13 (b) External view of input unit (Multiple axis)(A14B–0076–B401)


300

Con

nect

or a

rran

gem

ent o

n th

e P

CB

15B

INP

UT

Uni

t PC

B

(AC INPUT)

CPD1 (AC OUTPUT)

Key location

F11 (AC INPUT FUSE)F12 (AC INPUT FUSE)F13 (DC OUTPUT FUSE)CPD2A (POWER CONTROL)

CPD2B (POWER CONTROL)

CPD2C (POWER CONTROL)

LED of pilot lamp (Green)

LED of alarm lamp (Red)

Fig. 13 (c) External dimensions of input unit (multi–axis machine)(A14B–0076–B402)


301

Scr

ew fo

r gro

undi

ng (M

4)S

crew

term

inal

blo

ck (M

4)

Fig. 13 (d) External view of expanded power input unit(A14B–0076–B209)


302

TYPE: HONDA PCR–E20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)

USAGE: GENERAL

MATING: HONDA PCS–E20LA (METAL)

HOUSING: HONDA PCS–V20L (PLASTIC)

DisplayHONDA

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ AÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ BÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

PCR–E20FSÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

21.65ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

11.43ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFig. 14 (a) External view of PCR connector (soldering type)


303

TYPE: HIROSE FI40–2015S

USAGE: PULSE CODER INTERFACELINEAR SCALE INTERFACEMPG INTERFACE

MATING/HOUSING: HIROSE FI–20–CV

Tab forshieldcon-nec–tion

Section AA

Fig. 14 (b) External view of FI40 connector


304

TYPE: HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)PCR–V20LB (for 8 dia. cable)

USAGE: GENERAL

Case Cable clamp Lock bracket Lock lever Set screw for cable clamp

Fig. 15 (a) External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)


305

TYPE: HIROSE FI–20–CV2

USAGE: GENERAL

Case Cable clamp Lock bracket Lock lever Set screw for cable clamp

Fig. 15 (b) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV2 type)


306

TYPE: FUJITSU FCN–240C 20–Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)

USAGE: GENERAL

Lock lever

ScrewCable clamp

Fig. 15 (c) External view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)


307

TYPE: HIROSE FI–20–CV

USAGE: PULSE CODER INTERFACELINEAR SCALE INTERFACEMANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE

Case Lock bracket Lock lever Cable clamp Set screw for cable clamp

Fig. 15 (d) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV type)

3 G

2 S

1 R

POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1200VAC INPUT

Key location

POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1200VAC OUTPUT CP2

3 G

2 200B

1 200A

10 LCD/MDI UNIT CP113 G

2 200B

1 200A


308

TYPE: AMP 1–178128–3

USAGE:

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (a) External view of AMP connector (1–178128–3)

B3 FB

B2 FA

B1 AL

COM

OFF

A1 ON

POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP4ON/OFF CONTROL


309

TYPE: AMP 2–178129–6

USAGE:

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (b) External view of AMP connector (2–178129–6)

POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP5+24V OUTPUT

3

2 0V

1 +24V


310

TYPE: AMP 2–178288–3

USAGE:

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (c) External view of AMP connector (2–178288–3)

POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP6+24E OUTPUT

3

2 0V

1 +24E


311

TYPE: AMP 1–178288–3

USAGE:

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (d) External view of AMP connector (1–178288–3)


312

TYPE: AMP 1–175218–2 (Gold coated)AMP 1–175218–5 (Tin coated)

Reel: AMP 1–175196–2 (Gold coated)AMP 1–175196–5 (Tin coated)

WIRE: AWG 16, 18, 20

PRESSER ID–MARK

PLATING ID–MARK

In case of reel

Fig. 16 (e) External view of AMP connector (1–175196–2/–5, 175218–2/–5)


313

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Symbol

Specification

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

AÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

(B)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

CÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

(D)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Number ofterminals

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

MR–20LMH (Plug) ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

39.3ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

44.9ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


17ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

20ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

MR–20LFH (Jack)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

MR–50LMH (Plug)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

67.9


73.5

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

44.8


18


50


MR–50LFH (Jack)


Symbol


1



3ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

4


Name


Connector cover


Cable clampÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

StopperÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Screw for cable clampÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Plug (MR–20, 50MH)


Jack (MR–20, 50FH)

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

5

Outer diameter of the cableMR–20L dia. 10 mm

maxME–50L dia. 16 mm max

Fig. 17 (a) External view of HONDA connector (case)


314



MR–20RHF


MR–50RHF


SymbolÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


2


3

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

NameÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Cable clampÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Screw 2.6 dia. ×8


Connector (MR–20, 50FH)

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

AÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

BÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Number ofterminals

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

32.8 ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


20




50

Fig. 17 (b) External view of HONDA connector (female)


315



MR–20RMH


MR–50RMH


Symbol




3


Name


Cable clampÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Screw 2.6 dia. ×8ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Connector (MR–20, 50FH)


A ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

B ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Number ofterminalsÂÂÂÂÂ




20




50

Fig. 17 (c) External view of HONDA connector (male)


316

MR–50MH(50–core, plug)

MR–50FH(50–core, plug)

MR–20MH(20–core, plug)

MR–20FH(20–core, plug)

Fig. 17 (d) External view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)


317

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

NameÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Specification(Connector maker

number)

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Remarks


RC16M–23T3


RC16M–SCT3


For details on tools requiredfor crimp terminals, contactthe manufacturer.


SMS3PK–5ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

BlackÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Connector housing for cable


(Crimp type)


(Solder type)


Contact

Cables: Cross sectional area: 0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)Insulation diameter: 2.8 mm maxPeeling length: 7.2 mm

Manufacturer: FCI Japan

Fig. 18 (a) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)


318

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ



number)


Remarks


RC16M–23T3


RC16M–SCT3




SMS3PNS–5ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

BrownÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Connector housing for cableÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

(Crimp type)


(Solder type)


Contact



Fig. 18 (b) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)


319




number)


Remarks


RC16M–23D28





SMS3PWS–5ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

WhiteÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


(Crimp type)



Contact



Fig. 18 (c) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)


320




number)


Remarks


RC16M–23T3


RC16M–SCT3




SMS6PN–5 ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

BrownÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


(Crimp type)


(Solder type)


Contact



Fig. 18 (d) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)


321

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Name



number)


Remarks


RC16M–23T28ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ




SMS6PW–5 ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

WhiteÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Connector housing for cable


(Crimp type)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


Contact



Fig. 18 (e) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)


322

A 53.0 D 17.8 G 10.7B 38.3 E 12.6 H

A–Across section

2–3.05 f

Fig. 19 (a) External view of reader puncher panel connector

M2.6 × P0.45 screwInterlockscrew

Small roundhead screw

Spring washer

1.2 groove

Fig. 19 (b) External view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock

Color: Cream

Fig. 20 External view of power receptacle for portable tape reader

NOTEWhen connecting with crimp terminal, use M4 terminal (all 3 poles)


323

4–M4 counter sinking

Minus polarity indication

Plus polarity indication

Plus terminal with3–M3 screw holes

Minus terminal with3–M3 screw holes

4–f 4.3 Mounting holes

Arrow view A

Fig. 21 External view of battery case for absolute pulse coder


324

Fig. 22 External View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15–B (MMC– II )

NOTE1 This unit is not dustproof.2 Ambient temperature during operation: 0°C to 40°C3 Weight: 1 kg

Tilt mechanism

Fig. 23 External View of the Keyboard for Series 15–B (MMC– II )

NOTE1 This unit is not dustproof.2 A 0.6–m signal cable is attached.3 Ambient temperature during operation: 0°C to 40°C4 Weight: 2.5 kg


325

Air flow

2–f 5.8

Fig. 24 External view of the hard disk unit for Series 15–B (MMC– II )

NOTE1 This is not dustproof type. Build in to the magnetics cabinet of an enclosed structure together

with the control unit.2 Ambient temperature at operation: 5°C to 55°C3 Other environmental conditions are the same as in the control unit.4 Install in the direction of the air flow being upward as shown in the diagram above. Do not install

in the direction of the air flow being sideways.5 Weight: 3.5 kg


326

Fig. 25 External view of the Portable 5 ″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B (MMC– II )

NOTE1 This unit is not dustproof. Use this unit exclusively for program development.2 Ambient temperature during operation: 5°C to 35°C3 Purchase the floppy disk unit, 1.5–m signal cable and 1.6–m power supply cable from FANUC.

(A08B–0047–K822)4 Weight: 6 kg


327

Fig. 26 External view of the Portable 3.5 ″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B (MMC– II )

NOTE1 This unit is not dustproof. It should be used for program development only.2 Maintain an operating ambient temperature range of 5°C to 35°C.3 The floppy disk unit, and the 1.5–m signal cable and 1.5–m power cable are to be purchased

from FANUC. (A08B–0047–K822)4 Weight: 3.5 kg


328

Fig. 27 External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series 15–B (MMC– II ) (A08B–0047–C071)

B–62073E/04C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS

AND CABLESAPPENDIX

365

C 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLESÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

(1)Connector for the PC board

Model: PCR–EV20MDT manufactured by Honda TsushinThe connector for the PC board has been specially developed supportFANUC’s high–mounting density. The one of each maker’s includingPCR connectors made by Honda Tsushin are compatible with themating part of the connector and can be selected for the cableconnection.

(2)Cable connector

The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. Theconnectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) havebeen customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass producedas standard products.

Cableconnector

Use

General–purposeMDI, IOLINK,AMP,SPDL

Connectorbody

Type

HONDATsushin

Manufacturer

PCR–E20FA

Connectormodel name

PCR–V20LA*PCS–E20LA

Case modelname

f 6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)f6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)

Applicablecable O.D.

HIROSEElectric

FI30–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)

HONDATsushin

PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA*PCS–E20LA

f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

FUJITSU FCN–247J020–G/E

FCN–240C020–Y/S*

f 5.8mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

Mores 52622–2011* 52624–2015* f 6.2mm (f 5.9 to 6.5)

HIROSEElectric

FI40–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)FI40B–20S*(FI40A–20S*)

FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)

FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)

Pulse coder,coaxial cables,linear scale,manual pulsegenerator

Housing HIROSEElectric

FI40B–2015S*(FI40–2015S*)

FI–20–CV* f 8.5mm (f 8.0 to 9.0)

HONDATsushin

PCR–E20FS f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

FI40B–20S*(FI40A–20S*)

FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)

FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)

PCR–V20LA*PCS–E20LA f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

Housing

Fig. C (a) Cable connectors

NOTEUse the same maker’s connector body and housing tocombine them.

APPENDIX B–62073E/04C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS

AND CABLES

366

(3)Required tools for Connection of cable connector

(a) Separate–wire press–mount type

Connector: PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin)

28–AWG wires are assembled at a time. Generally, it is much morecost effective to assemble a cable this way than by using solder orpress–mount type connectors. Inquire the each connector maker aboutthe connection tools.

(b)Solder type

Connector: PCR–E20FS (Honda Tsushin) orFI40–2015S (Hirose)

Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the Honda Tsushinconnector. However, soldering many of these wires together lowerswork efficiency because the pitch of the soldering portion of theconnector is too small to support it. To increase work efficiency Hirose has developed a new connector.By thinning out the number of pins, its soldering portion has a pitchequal to that of the conventional Honda MF connectors. TheFI40–2015S can be used for interfacing pulse coders and manual pulsegenerators which require wires up to as 20 AWG thick for connectionwith a +5 V power source.

The following table describes the details of soldered connectors andcases.

Table C (a) Details of soldered connectors and cases.

Connector

Connector model (manufacturer)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ DescriptionÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

PCR–E20FS (HONDA Tsushin)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂSoldered connector for general–purpose applications compatible with small–lotcable assemblies and cable assemblies at the site.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


FI4–20S (HIROSE Electric)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

HONDA Tsushin PCR–E20FS or equivalent productÂÂ

ÂÂ


FI40B–20S (HIROSE Electric)(previously FI40A–20S)

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂThis connector has the same number of pins as the FI40–20S, and has a wider rowalignment at its soldering section for facilitating soldering which makes it moresuitable for soldering thick electrical leads. This connector features higher terminalstrength over the FI40A–20S (suitable for soldering electrical leads up to #20AWGthick) and is suitable for electrical leads up to #17AWG thick. Note, however, thatwhen thick electrical leads such as #17AWG are used, we recommend using higherstrength case such as the FI–20–CV6.

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


FI40B–2015S (HIROSE Electric)(previously FI40A–2015S)ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


This connector utilizes the space obtained by skipping some of the pins to producea wider pitch at the soldering section. The FI40B–2015S is an improved version ofthe F140–2015S, and features higher terminal strength. This allows electrical leadsup to #17AWG in cables having an outside diameter of up to 8.5 mm to be partiallysoldered.

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Case

Case model (manufacturer)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ DescriptionÂ

ÂÂÂ


FI–20–CV5 (HIROSE Electric)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂThis plastic case is recommended for the FI40B–20S, and is suitable for cables upto outside diameter 9.2 mm.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


FI–20–CV6 (HIROSE Electric)ÂÂÂ



This die–cast metal case has been developed for the FI40B–20S, and is suitable forthick cables up to outside diameter 10.25 mm.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ




AND CABLESAPPENDIX

367

When cases and soldered connectors made by HIROSE Electric are usedin combination, you can select combinations shown in the figure belowin addition to those describes in Figure C(a). However, the outsidediameter of cables used must be compatible with the applicable outsiderdiameter of the case.

FI40–20SFI40B–20S

(previously FI40A–20S)

Connector model

⋅ FI40B–2015S(previously FI40–2015S)

Â ÂCase model (applicable cable O.D.)

⋅ FI–20–CV (f 8.5 mm dia.) only compatible

Â ÂFI–20–CV2 (f 6.2 mm)FI–20–CV5 (f 9.2 mm)

FI–20–CV6 (f 10.25 mm)

These connectors andcases are mutuallycompatible.

(4)Recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatiblecables

Table C (b) List of recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatible cables

Name of connector inconnection manual

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFANUC authorized

connector(manufacturer)

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFANUC

authorizedhousing (=case)(manufacturer)

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂCompatible cable

(cable O.D.)FANUC developed

productFANUC specification No.

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Remarks

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

PCR–E20FAConnector body

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFCR–E20FA (HONDA Tsushin)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂPCR–V20AL(HONDA Tsushin)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂA66L–0001–0284#10P(O.D. 6.2 mm dia.)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂPlasticÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

PCS–E20LA(HONDA Tsushin)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

MetalÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

FI30–20S (HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFI–20–CV2(HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

PlasticÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

FCN–247J020–G/E(FUJITSU Takamisawa)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFCN–240C020–Y/S (FUJITSUTakamisawa)

ÂÂÂÂ


PlasticÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

52622–2011 (Morex)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ52624–2015(Morex)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

PlasticÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

PCR–E20FSHousingÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ FCR–E20FS (HONDA Tsushin)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂPCR–V20LA (HONDA Tsushin)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

PlasticÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

PCS–E20LA (HONDA Tsushin)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

MetalÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

FI40–20S (HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFI–20–CV2(HIROSE Electric)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

PlasticÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

FI40B–2015S(previously FI40–2015S)15–pin soldered type

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ FI40B–2015S(previously FI40–2015S)(HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFI–20–CV(HIROSE Electric)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂA66L–0001–0286 (Note)A66L–0001–0402 (Note)(O.D. 8.5 mm dia.)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂPlasticÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

FI40B–20S(previously FI40A–20S)Housing

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFI40B–20S(previously FI40A–20S)(HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂFI–20–CV5 (HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂA66L–0001–0367A66L–0001–0368(O.D. 9.2 mm dia.)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂPlasticÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


FI40B–20S(HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

FI–20–CV6 (HIROSE Electric)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

A66L–0001–0403 (Note)(O.D. 9.8 mm dia.)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

MetalÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


AND CABLES

368

NOTEUp till now we have recommend using pulse coder cable (A66L–0001–0286) up to 20 m inlength. We have developed two new cables: A66L–0001–0402 that can be used up to 30 m,and A66L–0001–0403 that can be used up to 50 m. (For detailed specifications, see Figure 4.)These cables (A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403) not only demonstrate the same oilresistance as cable A66L–0001–0286, they are also bend–resistant (100 mm dia. cables canbe bent up to one million operations), and comply with UL and CSA standards.

(5)Cable wires

Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machinetool builder for the Series 15–B/16/18.FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interfaceconnector of the Series 15–B/16/18. They are listed in the table below,for your convenience when ordering from the manufacturer.(In addition to these, a cable for moving parts is under development.)

Cable typeÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ UseÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ StructureÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ FANUC specification No.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Manufac–turerÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ RemarksÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

10–pair cableÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂGeneral purposeÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂTen 0.08–mm2

pairs

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂA66L–0001–0284#10PÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Hitachi Cable, Oki Electric Cable

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

6–core coaxialcable

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂCRT interfaceÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂCoaxial sixcores

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂA66L–0001–0296ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Hitachi CableÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ50 m maximumÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

Composite12–core cable(Note 2)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Pulse coders, linearscales, and manualpulse generators

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ


Six 0.5–mm2

wires and three0.18–mm2 pairs

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ


A66L–0001–0286ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


Hitachi Cable, Oki Electric Cable

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


20 m maximum(Note 2)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ


NOTEFor the pulse coder, scale, and manual pulse generator, each of which has a +5–V powersupply, wires need to be selected taking into consideration the supply voltage drop caused bythe resistance of the cable.A66L–0001–0286 has been designed for use with a cable length of 20 mm or less. If the cablelength exceeds 20 m, connect A66L–0001–0286 to a cable with a lower resistance, such asA66L–0001–0157.The number of manual pulse generators to be connected is assumed to be three. If only onegenerator is connected, the cable can be extended to a maximum of 50 m by connecting wireswith in parallel a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2 for the power supply.


AND CABLESAPPENDIX

369

(6)10–pair cable

(a) Specifications

ItemÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ UnitÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ SpecificationsÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Product No.ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ—

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂA66L–0001–0284#10P

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ManufacturerÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂHitachi Cable, Ltd. Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


RatingÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ60C 30 V: UL278980C 30 V: UL80276

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


MaterialÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂConductorÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —Â

ÂÂÂÂÂStranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B–286)Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

InsulatorÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —Â

ÂÂÂÂÂCross–linked vinylÂ

ÂÂÂ


Shield braidÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

—ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Tinned annealed copper wireÂÂ

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

SheathÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ—

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂHeat–resistant oilproof vinyl

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Number of pairsÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ PairsÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 10Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂConductorÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂSizeÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ AWGÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 28Â

ÂÂÂ


StructureÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂConductors/

mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ7/0.127

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Outside diameterÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ0.38

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


InsulatorÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂThicknessÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ mmÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ 0.1Thinnest portion: 008 (3.1 mm)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Outside diameter(approx.)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 0.58

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

Core style (rating)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂUL1571 (80C, 30V)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Twisted pairÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂOutside diameter(approx.)ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ 1.16ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

PitchÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mmÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 20 or lessÂ

ÂÂÂ


LayÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂCollect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, thenwrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,apply a cable separator as required.

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


Lay diameter (approx.)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mmÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 3.5Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂDrain wireÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂConductors/mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂHitachi Cable: Not available Oki Electric Cable: Available, 10/0.12

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Shield braidÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂElement wirediameter

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ 0.12ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

Braid densityÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ %Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ 85 or moreÂ

ÂÂÂ


SheathÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ColorÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

—ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

BlackÂÂ

ÂÂ


ThicknessÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ1.0

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Outside diameter(approx.)ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ 6.2ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Standard lengthÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

mÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

200ÂÂ

ÂÂ



AND CABLES

370

Item SpecificationsUnitÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Packing methodÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ BundleÂ

ÂÂÂ


Electricalperformance

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂElectricresistance (at 20C)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂW/km

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ233 or less

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ

Insulationresistance (at 20C)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂMW–kmÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ 10 or moreÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Dielectric strength(AC)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂV/min.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ300

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Flame resistanceÂÂÂ



—ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ(b) Indications on the cable

On the surface of the cable, print in indelible ink the UL–certifiedcomponent classification mark, UL style no., manufacturer’sname, and flame resistance mark.

(c) Cable structure

6

7

1

5

4

2

3


Wire No.

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Insulator colorÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

First wireÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Second wire

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Blue

Yellow

Green

Red

Purple

Blue

Yellow

Green

Red

Purple


White

White

White

White

White

Brown

Brown

Brown

Brown

Brown

8

10

9

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Twisted–pair wire

Binding tape

Shield braid

Sheath

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.

Wire identification table (Hitachi)

Fig. C (b) Cable made by Hitachi Cable


AND CABLESAPPENDIX

371

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

7

5

1

6

4

2

3

8

10

9


Dotmark

(1 pitch)


Dot markcolor

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Firstwire

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

–

–

–

–

–

––

––

––

––

––

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

ÂÂÂÂ


Secondwire

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black


Insula-tor

color

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Orange

Gray

White

Yellow

Pink

Orange

Gray

White

Yellow

Pink


PairNo.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

ÂÂÂÂÂ Drain wire

Â Twisted–pair wire

ÂÂ

Binding tape

ÂÂÂÂ

Shield braid

ÂSheath

Fig. C (c) Cable made by Hitachi Cable

(7)Composite 12–core cable

(a) Specifications

ItemÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂUnit

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂSpecifications

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Product No.ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂA66L–0001–0286

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ManufacturerÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂOki Cable, Ltd. Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


RatingÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ80°C, 30 VÂ

ÂÂÂ


MaterialÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂConductor,braid–shieldedwire, drain wire

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ —ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂStrand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C 3152)ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

InsulatorÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —Â

ÂÂÂÂÂHeat–resistant flame–retardant vinylÂ

ÂÂÂ


SheathÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —Â

ÂÂÂÂÂOilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinylÂ

ÂÂÂ


Number of wires (wire nos.)ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂCores

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ6 (1 to 6)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ConductorÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂSizeÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mm2Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ 0.5Â

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 0.18Â

ÂÂÂ


StructureÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂConductors/mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ 20/0.18ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 7/0.18ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂ

Outside diameterÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mmÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 0.94Â


ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

InsulatorÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂStandard thickness(The minimumthickness is at least80% of the standardthickness.)

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ0.25

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ0.2

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Outside diameterÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

mmÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

1.50ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

0.94ÂÂ

ÂÂ



AND CABLES

372

Item SpecificationsUnitÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Twisted pairÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂOutside diameterÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mmÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ


Direction of layÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ—

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂLeft

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


PitchÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ20 or less

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

LayÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂTwist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer isright–twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer. Apply acable separator as required.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Lay diameterÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ5.7

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Drain wireÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂSizeÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mm2Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ 0.3Â

ÂÂÂ


StructureÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂWires/mmÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 12/0.18Â

ÂÂÂ



ÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ0.72

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Shield braidÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂElement wirediameterÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ 0.12ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

ThicknessÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mmÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 0.3Â

ÂÂÂ


Braid densityÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ %Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ 70Â

ÂÂÂ


Outside diameterÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

mmÂÂÂÂÂÂ

6.3ÂÂ

ÂÂ


SheathÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂColorÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ—

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂBlack

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ

Standard thickness(The minimumthickness is at least85% of the standardthickness.)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ mmÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ 1.1ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂÂÂmm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ8.5 Max. 9.0 (Note)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Standard lengthÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ mÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂ 100Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂPacking methodÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ —Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ BundleÂ

ÂÂÂ



ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂElectricresistance (at20°C) (wire nos.)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂΩ/km

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ39.4

(1 to 6)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ113

(7 to 9)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

Insulationresistance (at20°C)

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂΜΩ–kmÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ 15ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Dielectric strength(AC)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ V/min.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 500

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Flame resistanceÂÂÂ



—ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂ

Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂNOTE

The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than the drain wire.


AND CABLESAPPENDIX

373

(b)Markings on cable

(1)Name or symbol of the manufacturer

(2)Manufacturing year

(c) Cable structure

The cable structure is shown below.

The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.


3Black

1Black

2Black

4Red

6Red

5Red

ÂÂÂÂÂ

Â

ÂÂÂÂÂ9

7

8

Red

White

Red

Black

Black

White

ÂÂ

ÂÂ

Drain wire

0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire

0.5–mm2 insulated wire

Binding tape

Shield braid

Sheath

ItemÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂSpecifications

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Product No.ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ A66L–0001–0402Â

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ A66L–0001–0403Â

ÂÂÂ


ManufacturerÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Oki Cable Ltd.ÂÂ

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂA core wire

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂB core wire

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂA core wire

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂB core wire

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ConductorÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂStructureConductors/mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 16/0.12(0.18 mm2)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ 3/22/0.12(0.75 mm2)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ 16/0.12(0.18 mm2)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ 7/16/0.12(1.25 mm2)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂ

O.D. mmÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 0.55Â

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 1.20Â



ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂInsulator(polyester)ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂColorÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ white, red, blackÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ red, blackÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ white, red, blackÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ red, blackÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ(polyester)ÂÂÂ

Thickness mmÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ0.16

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ0.23

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ0.16

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ0.25

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Outside diametermm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 0.87

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 1.66

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Twisted pairÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂStructureÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂwhite×red,

white×black,black×red

ÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂÂÂwhite×red,

white×black,black×red

ÂÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Direction of layÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

LeftPitch typ. 20 mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

LeftPitch typ. 20 mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


AND CABLES

374

Item SpecificationsÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ


Product No. A66L–0001–0403A66L–0001–0402ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Manufacturer Oki Cable Ltd.ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ


LayÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂNumber of wires

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 3 pairs

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 6 cores

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 3 pairs

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 6 cores

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

Direction of layÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ LeftÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ LeftÂ

ÂÂÂ


TapingÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂTape the outermost layer withJapanese paper after twisting.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂTape the outermost layer withJapanese paper after twisting.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

O.D. standard mmÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 5.7Â

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 6.9Â

ÂÂÂ


Shield braidÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂElement wire diameter

standard mm

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ0.14

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Thickness standard mmÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ80

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

DrainÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Wrap one wire set comprising 12/0.8 mm under the shield braid.Â

ÂÂÂ


O.D. standard mmÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 6.4Â

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 7.6Â

ÂÂÂ


Sheath(polyester)

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ColorÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Black (matte)ÂÂ

ÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ(polyester)ÂÂÂ

Thickness standard mmÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ1.05

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ1.1

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

Diagonal tapingÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Diagonally wrap Japanese paper tape underneath the sheath.Â

ÂÂÂ


O.D. mmÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

8.5" 0.3ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

9.8" 0.3ÂÂ

ÂÂ


Completedproduct

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂStandard length mÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ100

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


productÂÂ

Short lengthÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ In principle, not recognized as a completed product.Â

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂPerformance ofcompleted

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂRatingÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 80°C 30 VÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂcompletedproductÂÂÂ

StandardÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂMust comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C30V

FT–1

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Fire resistanceÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂMust pass VW–1 and FT–1.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ



ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂElectric resistance

W/km (at 20°C)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 103 max.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 25.5 max.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 103 max.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 15.0 max.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Insulation resistanceMW/km (at 20°C)

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂAt least 1

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ

Dielectric strength V–min.

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂA.C 500

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Insulationperformance

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂTensile strength N/mm2ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂAt least 9.8

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


performanceÂÂ

Elongation %ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ At least 100Â

ÂÂÂ


Tensile strength afteraging %

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 70% or more of pre–aging valueÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

Elongation after aging%ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 65% or more of pre–aging valueÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Aging conditionsÂÂÂ


113°C, 168 hoursÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


AND CABLESAPPENDIX

375

Item SpecificationsÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ


Product No. A66L–0001–0403A66L–0001–0402ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Manufacturer Oki Cable Ltd.ÂÂÂ


ÂÂÂ


Sheathperformance

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂTensile strength N/mm2

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ At least 9.8

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

performanceÂÂ

Elongation %ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ At least 100Â

ÂÂÂ


Tensile strength afteraging %

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ70% or more of pre–aging value

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


ÂÂ

Elongation after aging%ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 65% or more of pre–aging valueÂ

ÂÂÂ


Aging conditionsÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ113°C, 168 hours

ÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂ


Cable structureÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Single lead B


ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Â

Shield braid

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

Red

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ


Pair lead A

Â

Drain wire

ÂSheath

ÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂ

Binding tape

Red

Red

Black

Black

Black

Red

Red


ÂÂÂÂÂ




ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

APPENDIX B–62073E/04D. ATTACHING THE CRT

PROTECTIVE COVER

376

D ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVERÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ

A CRT protective cover must be attached to the 9″ monochrome CRT tocomply with CE marking (machine tool) directives.The 9″ monochrome CRT is also provided with a protective cover(specification : A02B–0200–K820) between its top surface and rearsurface.

B–62073E/04D. ATTACHING THE CRT

PROTECTIVE COVERAPPENDIX

377

Insert under panel.

Attaching the bottom cover (viewed from below)

Bottom cover

Insert under panel.

Side cover Insert between panels.

Attaching the side cover (viewed from side)

CRT protective cover

IndexB–62073E/04

i–1

Numbers ¡10.4″ LCD display interface (CE marking compliant with

built–in graphic function), 222

14″ analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD display interface (CEmarking compliant when MMC–IV is not used), 218

14″ analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD display interface (CEmarking compliant when MMC–IV is used), 220

20–pin interface connectors and cables, 366

9″ CRT or 9″ PDP display interface (CE markingnon–compliant), 214

9″ CRT or PDP display interface (CE marking compliant), 216

A¡Action against noise, 30

Additional cabinet (in case of analog spindle interface), 86

Additional cabinet (in case of serial spindle interface), 85

Address–fixed signals, 207

Adjusting the flat display, 224

ALARM LEDs on source output operator’s panel connectionunit, 195

Analog spindle interface, 256

APC battery interface, 272

Attaching the CRT protective cover, 377

B¡Battery for memory backup, 44

C¡Cabinet design and installation conditions of the machine tool

magnetic, 10

Cabinet exterior environmental requirements, 7

Cabinet lead–in for stand–alone cabinet A, 67

Cable clamp and shield processing, 37

Cable connection [Connection to the input unit(A02B–0075–J141, –J142, –J144, and –J145), 116

Cable lead–in for additional cabinet A, 69

Cable lead–in for stand–alone cabinet B, 68

Cable lead–in–diagram, 47

Configuration, 4

Configuration and installation of the control unit, 40

Configuration of control unit connectors, 47

Connecting connection unit 1 and connection unit 2, 149

Connecting input power source, 135

Connecting signal cables, 138

Connecting the connection unit, 147

Connecting the power supply unit, 97

Connecting with I/O modules, 141

Connection between the control unit and additional locker, 88

Connection between the series 15–B (MMC–II) and peripheralunits, 275

Connection diagram, 134

Connection diagram for MMC–IV, 92

Connection diagram for series 15–B (in case of MMC–III), 89,91

Connection diagram for series 15–MB or series 150–MB (incase of multiple axis), 83

Connection diagram for series 15–TB/TTB/MB (whenLCD/MDI unit with built–in graphic functions is used), 77

Connection diagram for series15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150–TB/MB/TTB(in case of analog spindle), 80

Connection diagram for series15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150–TB/MB/TTB(in case of serial spindle), 74

Connection diagram for series15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150–TB/MB/TTB(when LCD/MDI unit with built–in graphic functions is notused), 74

Connection of FANUC I/O link by electric cable, 125

Connection of FANUC I/O link by optical fiber cable, 126

Connection of I/O units to machine interface, 120

Connection of input unit for additional cabinet A, 115

Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet A, 105

Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet B, 110

Connection of operator’s panel connection unit, 175

Connection of reference position approach signal, 247

Connection of source output operator’s panel connection unit,189

Connection of tape reader with reels, 235

Connection of tape reader without reels, 234

Connection of the FANUC I/O link, 123

Connection of the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, 131

Connection pin assignment addresses of source outputoperator’s panel connection unit, 197

Connection to CNC peripherals, 208

Connection to control unit, 114

Connection to input unit (A14B–0076–B411), 111

Connection to input units (A14B–0076–B004, –B005, and–B008), 105

Connection to the control unit, 109

Connection with a floppy disk unit for unit FANUC series 15–B(MMC–II), 287

Connection with a hard disk unit for FANUC series 15–B(MMC–II), 283

Connection with a printer using the centronics interface forFANUC series 15–B (MMC–II), 279

Connection with an extension adapter unit for FANUC series15–B (MMC–II), 281

Connection with an external device using the RS–422 interfacefor series 15–B (MMC–II), 277

Connection with the FANUC handy file, 233

Connector layout for operator’s panel connection unit, 179

Connector pin assignment for the connection unit, 154

Control unit, 40, 84

Cooling by heat exchanger, 13

Cooling fin A/B/C, 16

INDEX B–62073E/04

i–2

Correspondence between I/O signals and address in a module,145

CRT/MDI unit interface, 209

D¡Details of machine side connection of source output operator’s

panel connection unit, 199

Details of the connection between the connection unit and themachine, 156

Details of the connection between the operator’s panelconnection unit and the machine, 181

Digital input/output module, 143

DNC interface, 248

DNC1 interface, 248

DNC2 interface (RS–232–C), 250

DNC2 interface (RS422), 251

E¡Emergency stop signal, 294

Environmental requirements, 7

External dimensions, 302

External dimensions of source output operator’s panelconnection unit, 206

External view of operator’s panel connection unit, 188

External view of the connection unit, 174

F¡FANUC cassette connection, 232

G¡General–purpose analog voltage input interface, 274

Ground, 31

Grounding, 136

Grounding each unit, 33

H¡Heat exchanger for CRT/MDI unit, 21

Heat loss of each unit, 14

High–speed DI signal interface, 244

Hybrid–control connections, 273

I¡I/O device interface, 229

Input signal regulations for the connection unit, 151

Input signal regulations for the operator’s panel connectionunit, 176

Input unit layout, 105, 110, 115

Installation, 6, 24

Installation conditions of the CNC inside cabinet and servo unit,8

Installing the heat exchanger, 16

Interface between MMC–III board and option 1 board (videosignal), 228

Interface between MMC–IV board and option 1 board (videosignal), 225

K¡Keyboard interface, 226

L¡Linear scale interface (A/B/Z signal interface), 269

Linear scale interface (serial interface), 271

List of external dimensions, 299

M¡Maintenance, 27

Maintenance area, 70

Maintenance area for additional cabinet A, 72

Maintenance area for self–standing A type cabinet, 70

Maintenance area for self–standing B type cabinet, 71

Manual pulse generator interface, 238

Mounting and dismounting modules, 132

N¡Noise suppressor, 36

Number of I/O points for I/O Unit–MODEL A, 145

O¡Outer dimensions, 132

Outer hard disk interface (MMC–III), 292

Output signal regulations for the connection unit, 153

Output signal regulations for the operator’s panel connectionunit, 177

Output signal standard for source output operator’s panelconnection unit, 192

P¡Portable tape reader connection, 231

Power capacity, 9

Power OFF sequence, 104

INDEXB–62073E/04

i–3

Power ON sequence, 104

Power supply unit and input unit connection, 94

Power supply unit panel layout, 95

PPR connection, 230

Pulse coder interface, 257

R¡Remote buffer interface (RS–232–C), 240

Remote buffer interface (RS–422), 242

Replacing the battery, 45

RS–232–C serial port, 229

RS–232–C serial port (MMC–III), 290

RS–422 serial port, 236

S¡Separating signal lines, 30

Serial pulse coder interface, 263

Serial spindle interface (α series), 255

Serial spindle interface (S series spindle), 254

Servo amp interface, 260

Servo interface, 259

Small 19″ keyboard interface, 227

Source output operator’s panel connection unit input signalstandard, 190

Spindle interface, 252

Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, 131

T¡Temperature rise within the cabinet, 13

The heat pipe type heat exchanger, 24

Thermal design of the cabinet, 13

Total connection, 73

W¡When AC output terminals for which power on/off is controlled

are insufficient, 103

When an input unit is not used, 97

When an input unit is used, 100

Rev

isio

n R

ecor

d

FAN

UC

MA

NU

AL

(B–6

2073

E)

04N

ov.,

’98

03F

eb.,

’95

The

follo

win

g pr

oduc

ts a

re a

dded

FA

NU

C S

erie

s 15

0-T

B

FAN

UC

Ser

ies

150-

TT

B

FAN

UC

Ser

ies

15-M

BC

orre

ctio

n of

err

ors

02F

eb.,

’94

The

follo

win

g pr

oduc

ts a

re a

dded

FA

NU

C S

erie

s 15

-TF

B

FAN

UC

Ser

ies

15-T

TF

B

FAN

UC

Ser

ies

15-M

FB

FA

NU

C S

erie

s 15

-MB

(M

ultip

le a

xis)

01O

ct.,

’92

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

· No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.

Documents

15 & 150-Model B Connection Manual (Hardware) GFZ-62073EN.pdf